TWI586180B - An image processing apparatus, an image processing method, and a storage medium for storing a program - Google Patents

An image processing apparatus, an image processing method, and a storage medium for storing a program Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI586180B
TWI586180B TW105110393A TW105110393A TWI586180B TW I586180 B TWI586180 B TW I586180B TW 105110393 A TW105110393 A TW 105110393A TW 105110393 A TW105110393 A TW 105110393A TW I586180 B TWI586180 B TW I586180B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
image
environment
unit
information
images
Prior art date
Application number
TW105110393A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW201628404A (en
Inventor
Tetsujiro Kondo
Original Assignee
I-Cubed Res Center Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by I-Cubed Res Center Inc filed Critical I-Cubed Res Center Inc
Priority to TW105110393A priority Critical patent/TWI586180B/en
Publication of TW201628404A publication Critical patent/TW201628404A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI586180B publication Critical patent/TWI586180B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Image Processing (AREA)

Description

圖像處理裝置、圖像處理方法、及儲存程式之儲存媒體 Image processing device, image processing method, and storage medium for storing programs

本發明係關於一種用於處理圖像的圖像處理裝置。 The present invention relates to an image processing apparatus for processing an image.

習知技術中,已有以由下列裝置所構成為特徵的數位圖像訊號之內插裝置。該數位圖像訊號之內插裝置包括:接收輸入圖像資料,並將存在於預定畫素之周邊位置的預定數個畫素資料抽出的裝置;以及使用求得係數所需的畫素資料,藉由最小自乘法以內插值和真值之誤差的自乘和達到最小的方式預先決定之預定數個係數、和所抽出的上述預定數個畫素資料的線形1次結合,而內插產生預定畫素之畫素資料的裝置(參照專利文獻1)。 In the prior art, there has been an interpolating device for digital image signals characterized by the following devices. The digital image signal interpolation device includes: means for receiving input image data, and extracting a predetermined number of pixel data existing at a peripheral position of the predetermined pixel; and using pixel data required for obtaining the coefficient, Predetermining a predetermined number of coefficients by a minimum self-multiplication method in a manner of maximizing the error of the interpolated value and the true value, and a linear combination of the extracted predetermined number of pixel data, and interpolating the predetermined order A device for displaying pixel data (see Patent Document 1).

此外,亦有從第1數位視頻訊號產生畫素數較該第1數位視頻訊號為多之第2數位視頻訊號的數位視頻訊號轉換裝置(參照專利文獻2)。 Further, there is also a digital video signal conversion device that generates a second digital video signal having a larger number of pixels than the first digital video signal from the first digital video signal (see Patent Document 2).

[先前技術文獻] [Previous Technical Literature]

(專利文獻1)日本特許第2825482號公報(第1頁、第1圖等) (Patent Document 1) Japanese Patent No. 2825882 (page 1, page 1, etc.)

(專利文獻2)日本特許第3072306號公報(第1頁、第1圖等) (Patent Document 2) Japanese Patent No. 3072306 (first page, first figure, etc.)

然而,習知技術並無法輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷的圖像。 However, conventional techniques cannot output images that adjust brain load depending on the purpose.

本申請案第一發明之圖像處理裝置具備:儲存部,其儲存具有1個或2個以上對應資訊的查找表,該對應資訊為用以取得1個或2個以上之第一圖像的全部或一部分與第二圖像之全部或一部分對應的資訊,而該第二圖像相較於第一圖像,係為其腦負荷經調整且與第一圖像相同對象的 圖像;圖像受理部,受理1個或2個以上圖像;映射部,使用1個或2個以上對應資訊中的任一對應資訊,來取得與圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像的全部或一部分相對應之1個或2個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分;以及圖像輸出部,輸出映射部所取得之1個以上第二圖像之全部、或為映射部所取得之1個以上第二圖像之一部分的集合的1個以上輸出圖像。 An image processing device according to a first aspect of the present invention includes: a storage unit that stores a lookup table having one or two or more pieces of corresponding information, wherein the corresponding information is used to acquire one or two or more first images. All or part of the information corresponding to all or a part of the second image, and the second image is compared with the first image, and the brain load is adjusted and the same object as the first image The image receiving unit receives one or two or more images, and the mapping unit acquires one or more accepted by the image receiving unit using one or more of the corresponding information. All or part of one or two or more second images corresponding to all or a part of the image; and an image output unit that outputs all of the one or more second images obtained by the mapping unit or is a mapping unit One or more output images of a set of one or more of the acquired second images.

依此種構成,可以輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷的圖像。 According to this configuration, it is possible to output an image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose.

再者,本申請案第二發明之圖像處理裝置中,相對於第一發明,其查找表具有2個以上對應資訊,且具備用以決定與圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應的第一圖像之全部或一部分的圖像解析部;映射部則使用與圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊,以取得與圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的第二圖像。 Further, in the image processing device according to the second aspect of the present invention, in the first aspect of the invention, the lookup table has two or more pieces of corresponding information, and is provided with one or more images for determining the image receiving unit. An image analysis unit that includes all or a part of the first image corresponding to all or a part of the first image; and the mapping unit uses the corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit to obtain and A second image corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit.

依此種構成,可以輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷的圖像。 According to this configuration, it is possible to output an image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose.

此外,本申請案第三發明之圖像處理裝置中,相對於第二發明,其第一圖像之全部或一部分係為所輸入影像中之一部分的第一時空區塊,第二圖像之全部或一部分係為輸出到畫面之影像中之一部分的第二時空區塊;圖像受理部受理為1個以上圖像之集合的影像,且具備分割部,用以將圖像受理部所受理之影像在空間性、或時間性、或空間性且時間性上分割成2個以上,而取得2個以上第一時空區塊;圖像解析部則按分割部所取得之2個以上各第一時空區塊的每個,來決定與各第一時空區塊相對應之第一圖像之全部或一部分;映射部又具備合成部,藉以按每個該2個以上各第一時空區塊,使用與圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊,來取得與圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的第二時空區塊,且將映射部所取得之2個以上各第二時空區塊配置在與2個以上各第二時空區塊相對應之第一時空區塊的時間性、或空間性、或空間性及時間性位置,並產生輸出圖像;圖像輸出部則將合成部所產生之輸出圖像予以輸出。 Furthermore, in the image processing apparatus of the third invention of the present application, all or part of the first image is a first space-time block of a part of the input image, and the second image is All or part of the image is a second space-time block that is output to one of the images of the screen; the image receiving unit receives the image of the set of one or more images, and includes a dividing unit for accepting the image receiving unit The image is divided into two or more spatially, temporally, spatially, temporally, and temporally, and two or more first space-time blocks are obtained; and the image analysis unit acquires two or more pieces according to the division unit. Each of the time-space blocks determines all or a portion of the first image corresponding to each of the first space-time blocks; the mapping portion further has a synthesis portion, whereby each of the two or more first space-time blocks And acquiring, by using the correspondence information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit, the second spatiotemporal block corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit And obtained by the mapping department The two or more second spatiotemporal blocks are arranged in temporal, or spatial, or spatial and temporal positions of the first spatiotemporal block corresponding to the two or more second spatiotemporal blocks, and generate an output image. The image output unit outputs the output image generated by the synthesizing unit.

依此種構成,可以輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷的圖像。 According to this configuration, it is possible to output an image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose.

再者,本申請案第四發明之圖像處理裝置中,相對於第二或第三發明,其圖像解析部係將圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像、或分割部所取得之2個以上各第一時空區塊予以解析,並取得1個以上的特徵量,且決定與1個以上特徵量相對應之第一圖像之全部或一部分。 Further, in the image processing device according to the fourth aspect of the present invention, the image analysis unit obtains one or more images received by the image receiving unit or the divided portion. The two or more first spatiotemporal blocks are analyzed, and one or more feature quantities are acquired, and all or a part of the first image corresponding to one or more feature amounts is determined.

依此種構成,可以輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷的圖像。 According to this configuration, it is possible to output an image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose.

此外,本申請案第五發明之圖像處理裝置中,相對於第一至第四之任一發明,其對應資訊係具有:關於在一個環境所得之一個對象的第一圖像之全部或一部分的1個以上特徵量;及用以產生和第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應之第二圖像之全部或一部分的演算式、或代入演算式之參數的集合。 Further, in the image processing device according to a fifth invention of the present invention, in relation to any one of the first to fourth inventions, the corresponding information has all or a part of the first image of an object obtained in an environment. One or more feature quantities; and a set of parameters used to generate all or a portion of the second image corresponding to all or a portion of the first image, or a set of parameters substituted into the formula.

依此種構成,可以輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷的圖像。 According to this configuration, it is possible to output an image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose.

再者,本申請案第六發明之圖像處理裝置中,相對於第一至第五之任一發明,其儲存部係儲存有2組對以上用以識別查找表之種類的種類識別符及與種類識別符相對應之查找表的組對;而映射部則具備:種類識別符取得裝置,其取得用以識別所利用之查找表種類的種類識別符;及輸出圖像取得裝置,其使用與種類識別符相對應之查找表所具有之對應資訊中之任一對應資訊,來取得與圖像受理部所受理之圖像之全部或一部分相對應的第二圖像之全部或一部分,作為輸出圖像之全部或一部分。 Further, in the image processing device according to the sixth aspect of the present invention, in the first to fifth inventions, the storage unit stores two or more pairs of the type identifiers for identifying the types of the lookup tables and a pair of lookup tables corresponding to the type identifier; the mapping unit includes: a type identifier acquiring means for acquiring a type identifier for identifying a type of the lookup table to be used; and an output image obtaining means for using All or a part of the second image corresponding to all or a part of the image accepted by the image receiving unit is obtained as any one of the corresponding information of the lookup table corresponding to the type identifier, and Output all or part of the image.

依此種構成,可以輸出依目的而更適當地調整腦負荷的圖像。 According to this configuration, it is possible to output an image in which the brain load is more appropriately adjusted depending on the purpose.

此外,本申請案第七發明之圖像處理裝置中,相對於第一至第六之任一發明,再具備:指示受理部,用於受理使用者之指示;及查找表更新部,其按照指示將查找表所具有的2個以上對應資訊之任一個加以變更。 Further, in the image processing device according to the seventh aspect of the present invention, the invention of any one of the first to sixth invention further includes: an instruction accepting unit that receives an instruction from the user; and a lookup table update unit that follows The instruction changes any one of the two or more corresponding information that the lookup table has.

依此種構成,可以輸出依目的而更適當地調整腦負荷的圖像。 According to this configuration, it is possible to output an image in which the brain load is more appropriately adjusted depending on the purpose.

又,本申請案第八發明之圖像處理裝置中,相對於第一至第七之任一發明,又具備限制條件(束制條件)儲存部,其儲存為輸入圖像、對應資訊、或輸出圖像中之1種以上資訊應滿足之條件的限制條件;映射部則使用1個或2個以上對應資訊中之任一對應資訊,以符合限制條件的方式, 來取得與圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應的1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分。 Further, in the image processing device according to the eighth aspect of the present invention, the invention of any one of the first to seventh invention includes a restriction condition (beaming condition) storage unit that is stored as an input image, corresponding information, or The restriction condition for the condition that one or more kinds of information in the output image should satisfy the condition; the mapping unit uses one or more corresponding information of one or more corresponding information to conform to the restriction condition, All or part of one or more second images corresponding to all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit is obtained.

依此種構成,可以輸出依目的而更適當地調整腦負荷的圖像。 According to this configuration, it is possible to output an image in which the brain load is more appropriately adjusted depending on the purpose.

本申請案第九發明的查找表取得裝置具備:第一圖像儲存部,其儲存1個以上第一圖像;第二圖像儲存部,儲存與1個以上的各第一圖像相對應的1個以上各第二圖像,該第二圖像相較於第一圖像為經調整腦負荷的圖像;儲存部,其儲存具有1個或2個以上對應資訊之查找表,該對應資訊為用以取得1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分與1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分之相對應的資訊;查找表構成部,由儲存在第一圖像儲存部之1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分及儲存在第二圖像儲存部之1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分,來構成具有1個或2個以上對應資訊的查找表;及查找表積存部,將查找表構成部所構成之查找表積存在儲存部。 The lookup table acquisition device according to a ninth invention of the present application includes: a first image storage unit that stores one or more first images; and a second image storage unit that stores one or more first images. One or more second images, the second image being an image with adjusted brain load compared to the first image; and a storage portion storing a lookup table having one or more corresponding information, Corresponding information is information for obtaining all or a part of one or more first images and all or a part of one or more second images; the lookup table component is stored in the first image storage unit All or part of one or more first images and all or part of one or more second images stored in the second image storage unit to form a lookup table having one or two or more corresponding information; The table storage unit stores the lookup table formed by the lookup table configuration unit in the storage unit.

依此構成,可以產生用以輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷之圖像的資訊。 According to this configuration, it is possible to generate information for outputting an image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose.

本申請案第十發明的查找表取得裝置中,相對於第九發明,其前述對應資訊包含:為有關1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分之資訊的第一圖像相關資訊;及為有關1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分之資訊,且為與第一圖像相關資訊相對應之資訊的第二圖像相關資訊,該查找表取得裝置又具備:第一圖像相關資訊取得部,從1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分取得為有關儲存在第一圖像儲存部之1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分之資訊的1個以上第一圖像相關資訊、及第二圖像相關資訊取得部,從1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分取得為有關儲存在第二圖像儲存部之1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分之資訊的1個以上第二圖像相關資訊;查找表構成部係用以構成具有1個或2個以上對應資訊的查找表,該對應資訊具有:第一圖像相關資訊取得部所取得之第一圖像相關資訊;及與第一圖像相關資訊相對應且為第二圖像相關資訊取得部所取得之第二圖像相關資訊,且該對應資訊係為顯示1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分與1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分相對應的資訊。 In the look-up table obtaining device of the tenth invention of the present invention, the corresponding information includes: first image related information relating to information of all or a part of one or more first images; and For the second image related information of the information corresponding to the information related to the first image, and the second image related information of the information corresponding to the information related to the first image, the lookup table obtaining device further includes: the first image related information The acquisition unit acquires one or more first image related information related to all or a part of information of one or more first images stored in the first image storage unit from all or a part of the one or more first images. And the second image related information acquisition unit acquires information on all or a part of the one or more second images stored in the second image storage unit from all or part of the one or more second images. More than one second image related information; the lookup table forming unit is configured to form a lookup table having one or two or more corresponding information, the corresponding information having: the first image obtained by the first image related information obtaining unit Related And the second image related information obtained by the second image related information obtaining unit corresponding to the first image related information, and the corresponding information is all or part of displaying one or more first images Information corresponding to all or a portion of one or more second images.

依此種構成,可以產生用以輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷之圖像的資訊。 According to this configuration, it is possible to generate information for outputting an image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose.

再者,本申請案第十一發明之查找表取得裝置中,相對於第九發明,其對應資訊具有:與1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的特徵量向量、及用以將1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分轉換為1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分的圖像轉換過濾器(filter);而查找表構成部係從1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分取得特徵量向量,並取得將1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分轉換為1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分的轉換過濾器,而構成具備1個或2個以上具有該特徵量向量和該轉換過濾器之對應資訊的查找表。 Further, in the lookup table acquisition device according to the eleventh aspect of the present invention, the correspondence information includes: a feature amount vector corresponding to all or a part of one or more first images, and Converting all or part of one or more first images into an image conversion filter of all or part of one or more second images; and the lookup table forming part is from one or more first images All or a part of the feature quantity vector is obtained, and a conversion filter that converts all or a part of one or more first images into one or more of the one or more second images is obtained, and one or two or more components are provided. A lookup table of the feature quantity vector and corresponding information of the conversion filter.

依此種構成,可以產生用以輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷之圖像的資訊。 According to this configuration, it is possible to generate information for outputting an image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose.

而且,本申請案第十二發明的查找表取得裝置(圖像處理裝置)中,相對於第九至第十一發明,又具備:第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部,其儲存與1個以上各第一圖像相對應的1個以上第二圖像資訊候補集合,該第二圖像資訊候補集合為有關與1個以上各第一圖像相同對象的2個以上第二圖像資訊之候補的集合;候補輸出部,輸出1個以上第二圖像資訊候補集合;指示受理部,其受理從候補輸出部所輸出之1個以上各第二圖像資訊候補集合所具有的2個以上第二圖像資訊之候補中選擇1個以上第二圖像資訊之候補的指示;及第二圖像積存部,其使用與指示受理部所受理之指示相對應的1個以上第二圖像資訊的候補,來取得1個以上第二圖像,並將該1個以上第二圖像和對應於第二圖像資訊候補集合的第一圖像相對應地積存於第二圖像儲存部。 Further, in the lookup table acquisition device (image processing device) according to the twelfth aspect of the present invention, the second image information candidate set storage unit is provided with one storage device and one for the ninth to eleventh inventions. One or more second image information candidate sets corresponding to the first images, wherein the second image information candidate set is two or more second image information related to one or more first images The candidate output unit outputs one or more second image information candidate sets, and the instruction accepting unit accepts two of the one or more second image information candidate sets outputted from the candidate output unit. An instruction to select one or more second image information candidates in the candidate for the second image information; and a second image storage unit that uses one or more second maps corresponding to the instruction received by the instruction accepting unit For example, the information candidate is obtained by acquiring one or more second images, and the one or more second images are stored in the second image storage corresponding to the first image corresponding to the second image information candidate set. unit.

依此種構成,可以產生用以對特定使用者輸出經調整腦負荷之圖像的資訊。 According to this configuration, information for outputting an image of the adjusted brain load to a specific user can be generated.

若依本發明所提供之圖像處理裝置,可以輸出相較於輸入圖像其腦負荷已按照目的進一步調整的圖像。 According to the image processing apparatus provided by the present invention, it is possible to output an image whose brain load has been further adjusted according to the purpose as compared with the input image.

1、2、4、5、6‧‧‧圖像處理裝置 1, 2, 4, 5, 6‧‧‧ image processing devices

3‧‧‧查找表取得裝置 3‧‧‧ lookup table acquisition device

7‧‧‧圖像學習裝置 7‧‧‧Image learning device

31‧‧‧第一圖像儲存部 31‧‧‧First Image Storage Department

32‧‧‧第二圖像儲存部 32‧‧‧Second image storage

33‧‧‧第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部 33‧‧‧Second image information candidate collection storage unit

34‧‧‧候補輸出部 34‧‧‧ alternate output

35‧‧‧第二圖像積存部 35‧‧‧Second image storage

36‧‧‧第一圖像相關資訊取得部 36‧‧‧First Image Related Information Acquisition Department

37‧‧‧第二圖像相關資訊取得部 37‧‧‧Second image related information acquisition department

38‧‧‧查找表構成部 38‧‧‧ Lookup Table Composition Department

39‧‧‧查找表積存部 39‧‧‧ Lookup Table

71‧‧‧圖像產生部 71‧‧‧Image Generation Department

72‧‧‧圖像積存部 72‧‧‧Image Accumulation Department

101‧‧‧儲存部 101‧‧‧ Storage Department

102、502‧‧‧限制條件儲存部 102, 502‧‧‧Restricted Condition Storage Department

103、503、603‧‧‧指示受理部 103, 503, 603‧‧‧Directed Reception Department

104‧‧‧圖像受理部 104‧‧‧Image Reception Department

105‧‧‧分割部 105‧‧‧ Division

106‧‧‧圖像解析部 106‧‧‧Image Analysis Department

107、507、607‧‧‧映射部 107, 507, 607‧‧ ‧ mapping department

108‧‧‧合成部 108‧‧‧Combination Department

109‧‧‧圖像輸出部 109‧‧‧Image Output Department

110‧‧‧查找表更新部 110‧‧‧ Lookup Table Update Department

340‧‧‧電腦系統 340‧‧‧ computer system

341‧‧‧電腦 341‧‧‧ computer

342‧‧‧鍵盤 342‧‧‧ keyboard

343‧‧‧滑鼠 343‧‧‧ Mouse

344‧‧‧顯示器 344‧‧‧ display

510‧‧‧限制條件變更部 510‧‧‧Restricted Condition Change Department

610‧‧‧LUT變更資訊變更部 610‧‧‧LUT Change Information Change Department

1071‧‧‧種類識別符取得裝置 1071‧‧‧Type identifier acquisition device

1072‧‧‧輸出圖像候補取得裝置 1072‧‧‧ Output image candidate acquisition device

1073‧‧‧判斷裝置 1073‧‧‧Judgement device

1074、5074‧‧‧變更裝置 1074, 5074‧‧‧Change device

1075‧‧‧輸出圖像取得裝置 1075‧‧‧ Output image acquisition device

3411‧‧‧FD驅動器 3411‧‧‧FD drive

3412‧‧‧CD-ROM驅動器 3412‧‧‧CD-ROM drive

3413‧‧‧MPU 3413‧‧‧MPU

3414‧‧‧匯流排 3414‧‧ ‧ busbar

3415‧‧‧ROM 3415‧‧‧ROM

3416‧‧‧RAM 3416‧‧‧RAM

3417‧‧‧硬碟 3417‧‧‧ Hard disk

3501‧‧‧CD-ROM 3501‧‧‧CD-ROM

3502‧‧‧FD 3502‧‧‧FD

5071‧‧‧特徵量取得裝置 5071‧‧‧Feature quantity acquisition device

5072‧‧‧限制條件決定裝置 5072‧‧‧Restriction determining device

6071‧‧‧第一特徵量取得裝置 6071‧‧‧First feature quantity acquisition device

6072‧‧‧第二特徵量取得裝置 6072‧‧‧Second feature quantity acquisition device

6073‧‧‧LUT變更資訊儲存裝置 6073‧‧‧LUT change information storage device

6074‧‧‧LUT決定裝置 6074‧‧‧LUT decision device

第1圖為實施形態1之圖像處理裝置1的方塊圖;第2圖為有關圖像處理裝置1之動作的說明流程圖;第3圖為有關圖像解析處理之說明流程圖;第4圖為有關映射處理的說明流程圖;第5圖為有關種類識別符取得處理的說明流程圖;第6圖為有關查找表更新處理的說明流程圖;第7圖為有關另一圖像處理裝置1的方塊圖;第8圖為實施形態2之圖像處理裝置2的方塊圖;第9圖為有關圖像處理裝置2之動作的說明流程圖;第10圖為另一圖像處理裝置2的方塊圖;第11圖為實施形態3之查找表取得裝置3的方塊圖;第12圖為查找表取得裝置3之有關第二圖像選擇動作的說明流程圖;第13圖為查找表取得裝置3之有關查找表構成動作的說明流程圖;第14圖為顯示複數個第二圖像資訊候補集合例的圖;第15圖為顯示第二圖像資訊候補集合之輸出例的圖;第16圖為顯示實施形態4之第一圖像例的圖;第17圖為顯示第二圖像例的圖;第18圖為顯示第一時空區塊例的圖;第19圖為顯示第二時空區塊例的圖;第20圖為說明查找表構成部之動作的概念圖;第21圖為查找表構成部之處理的概念圖;第22圖為查找表構成部之處理的概念圖。 1 is a block diagram of an image processing apparatus 1 according to Embodiment 1, FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining an operation of the image processing apparatus 1, and FIG. 3 is a flowchart for explaining an image analysis processing; The figure is a flow chart for explaining the mapping process; FIG. 5 is a flow chart for explaining the process of obtaining the class identifier; FIG. 6 is a flow chart for explaining the process of updating the lookup table; and FIG. 7 is a flowchart for explaining another image processing device; FIG. 8 is a block diagram of the image processing apparatus 2 of the second embodiment; FIG. 9 is a flowchart for explaining the operation of the image processing apparatus 2; and FIG. 10 is another image processing apparatus 2; FIG. 11 is a block diagram of the lookup table acquisition device 3 of the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a flow chart for explaining the second image selection operation of the lookup table acquisition device 3; and FIG. 13 is a lookup table. FIG. 14 is a view showing an example of a plurality of second image information candidate sets; and FIG. 15 is a view showing an output example of the second image information candidate set; Figure 16 shows the first image of Embodiment 4. Figure 17 is a diagram showing an example of a second image; Figure 18 is a diagram showing an example of a first space-time block; Figure 19 is a diagram showing an example of a second space-time block; and Figure 20 is a diagram showing an example of a second space-time block; A conceptual diagram of the operation of the table constituent unit; a conceptual diagram of the processing of the lookup table constituent unit in the 21st; and a conceptual diagram of the processing of the lookup table constituent unit in the 22nd.

第23圖為顯示查找表之例的圖;第24圖為實施形態5之圖像處理裝置4的方塊圖;第25圖為顯示景深較淺之圖像例的圖;第26圖為映射部之處理的概念圖;第27圖為實施形態6之圖像處理裝置5的方塊圖;第28圖為顯示拘束資訊例的圖; 第29圖為有關該圖像處理裝置5之動作的說明流程圖;第30圖為有關映射處理的說明流程圖;第31圖為有關限制條件決定處理之的明流程圖;第32圖為實施形態7之圖像處理裝置6的方塊圖;第33圖為顯示LUT變更資訊管理表例的圖;第34圖為有關圖像處理裝置6之動作的說明流程圖;第35圖為有關映射處理之說明流程圖;第36圖為有關LUT決定處理的說明流程圖;第37圖為實施形態8之圖像學習裝置7的方塊圖;第38圖為上述實施形態之電腦系統的概觀圖;以及第39圖為電腦系統的方塊圖。 Fig. 23 is a view showing an example of a lookup table; Fig. 24 is a block diagram showing an image processing apparatus 4 according to the fifth embodiment; Fig. 25 is a view showing an example of an image having a shallow depth of field; and Fig. 26 is a view showing a map portion; Figure 27 is a block diagram of the image processing apparatus 5 of the sixth embodiment; and Fig. 28 is a diagram showing an example of the constraint information; Fig. 29 is a flow chart for explaining the operation of the image processing apparatus 5; Fig. 30 is a flow chart for explaining the mapping processing; Fig. 31 is a flowchart for explaining the restriction condition determining processing; and Fig. 32 is an implementation flowchart; Fig. 33 is a block diagram showing an example of the LUT change information management table; Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing the operation of the image processing apparatus 6; and Fig. 35 is a map processing FIG. 36 is a block diagram showing an LUT decision process; FIG. 37 is a block diagram of the image learning device 7 of the eighth embodiment; and FIG. 38 is an overview of the computer system of the above embodiment; Figure 39 is a block diagram of a computer system.

(發明之實施形態) (Embodiment of the invention)

以下,參照圖面就圖像處理裝置等之實施形態加以說明。此外,實施形態中,由於標註相同符號之構成元件係執行相同的動作,故有省略再次重複說明之情形。 Hereinafter, embodiments of an image processing apparatus and the like will be described with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment, the same components are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will not be repeated.

(實施形態1) (Embodiment 1)

本實施形態中,係使用後述之查找表(look up table,LUT),就取得相較於所受理的圖像,其腦負荷係依目的進一步調整之圖像的圖像處理裝置加以說明。此外,所謂經依目的而調整腦負荷之圖像,係指例如視聽時可使腦負荷進一步減低之圖像、或視聽時對腦部給予刺激以増加娛樂性之圖像等。所謂視聽時可使腦部負荷更進一步減低之圖像,係指例如更容易認知對象之圖像等。再者,所謂目的,通常為視聽者進行圖像視聽時之目的,例如想要放鬆地進行視聽之目的、想要長時間視聽而儘量不會產生疲勞之目的、想要品嚐娛樂性之目的等。 In the present embodiment, an image processing apparatus that obtains an image whose brain load is further adjusted according to the purpose of obtaining an image compared to the accepted image is described using a lookup table (LUT) to be described later. Further, the image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose is, for example, an image in which the brain load is further reduced at the time of viewing, or an image in which the brain is stimulated at the time of viewing to add entertainment. An image in which the brain load is further reduced during viewing and viewing is, for example, an image that is easier to recognize. In addition, the purpose is usually for the purpose of viewing the image by the viewer, for example, to relax the purpose of viewing, to listen for a long time, to prevent fatigue, and to enjoy the purpose of entertainment. .

再者,本實施形態中,取得經依目的而調整腦負荷之圖像的處理,係按照例如每個時空區塊進行處理。有關時空區塊之說明,容後陳述。 Further, in the present embodiment, the process of obtaining an image for adjusting the brain load according to the purpose is processed in accordance with, for example, each spatiotemporal block. A description of the space-time block is presented later.

又,本實施形態中,查找表可客製化。 Further, in the present embodiment, the lookup table can be customized.

此外,本實施形態中,圖像處理裝置1具有在輸出候補之圖像未滿足預定條件時即進行轉換以滿足該預定條件的功能。 Further, in the present embodiment, the image processing apparatus 1 has a function of performing conversion to satisfy the predetermined condition when the image of the output candidate does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

第1圖為本實施形態之圖像處理裝置1的方塊圖。 Fig. 1 is a block diagram showing an image processing apparatus 1 of the present embodiment.

圖像處理裝置1具備:儲存部101、限制條件儲存部102、指示受理部103、圖像受理部104、分割部105、圖像解析部106、映射部107、合成部108、圖像輸出部109、及查找表更新部110。 The image processing device 1 includes a storage unit 101, a restriction condition storage unit 102, an instruction reception unit 103, an image reception unit 104, a division unit 105, an image analysis unit 106, a mapping unit 107, a synthesis unit 108, and an image output unit. 109. The lookup table update unit 110.

映射部107具備例如種類識別符取得裝置1071、輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072、判斷裝置1073、變更裝置1074、及輸出圖像取得裝置1075。 The mapping unit 107 includes, for example, a type identifier acquiring unit 1071, an output image candidate acquiring unit 1072, a determining unit 1073, a changing unit 1074, and an output image obtaining unit 1075.

儲存部101得以儲存1個或2個以上的查找表。儲存部101亦可儲存2組對以上由用以識別查找表種類之種類識別符和對應於種類識別符之查找表所構成的組對。此外,查找表之資料構造不限於表(table)型構造。查找表之資料構造則非所問。再者,所謂查找表之種類,亦可為查找表本身,當無庸贅言。 The storage unit 101 can store one or two or more lookup tables. The storage unit 101 may also store two sets of pairs of the above-mentioned types of identifiers for identifying the type of the lookup table and the lookup table corresponding to the type identifier. Further, the data structure of the lookup table is not limited to a table type structure. The data structure of the lookup table is not asked. Moreover, the so-called lookup table type can also be the lookup table itself, when there is no need to rumor.

在此處,查找表具有1個或2個以上對應資訊。對應資訊為用以取得1個或2個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分與1個或2個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分相對應之資訊。查找表所具有之對應資訊為一個時,這種對應資訊為例如轉換圖像之演算式、或為要加入到轉換圖像演算式的1個以上參數群。對應資訊亦可為例如計算時空區塊畫素值之中間值的演算式。 Here, the lookup table has one or more corresponding information. The correspondence information is information for obtaining all or a part of one or two or more first images and all or a part of one or two or more second images. When the corresponding information of the lookup table is one, the corresponding information is, for example, a calculation formula of the converted image or one or more parameter groups to be added to the converted image calculation formula. The corresponding information may also be, for example, a calculation formula for calculating the intermediate value of the pixel values of the spatiotemporal block.

又,1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分及1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分亦可為待輸出之一個畫面的圖像,也可為一個畫面的一部分區塊的圖像,也可為一個畫素,亦可為時間上連續的複數個畫面,亦可為時間上連續之複數個畫面之空間上的一部分(後述之時空區塊),或者是時間上連續之複數個畫面的連續一畫素的集合等。易言之,第一圖像及第二圖像之資訊量的單位並非所問。此外,所謂時空區塊,通常係指將影像作空間性、或時間性、或空間性及時間性分割所得的一部分。但是,時空區塊只要是畫素的集合即可。要言之,時空區塊並不限於矩形的連續區域。時空區塊亦可為非矩形且不連續之圖像區域。而且,分割圖像所取得之複數個時空區塊也可具有部分重複之畫素。 Further, all or a part of the one or more first images and all or a part of the one or more second images may be an image of one picture to be outputted, or may be an image of a part of a block. It can also be a single pixel, or a plurality of pictures that are consecutive in time, or a part of the space of a plurality of pictures that are consecutive in time (the space-time block described later), or a plurality of pictures that are consecutive in time. A collection of consecutive pixels, etc. In other words, the unit of information amount of the first image and the second image is not asked. In addition, the term "space-time block" generally refers to a part of the image obtained by spatial, temporal, or spatial and temporal division. However, the space-time block can be a collection of pixels. In other words, the space-time block is not limited to a continuous area of a rectangle. The space-time block can also be a non-rectangular and discontinuous image area. Moreover, the image obtained by dividing the image A plurality of spatiotemporal blocks may also have partially repeated pixels.

第二圖像為例如在進行視聽時,相較於第一圖像,可使腦部之負荷更為減低之圖像。此外,第二圖像為對一個對象進行認知時,相較於第一圖像,通常可使腦部之負荷更為減低之圖像。所謂可使腦部之負荷更為減低之圖像,係為腦部可以更感受到質感、遠近感、存在感、臨場感、重量感、温熱感、涼爽感、速度感、躍動感、動作順暢性、新鮮感、高級感中的1個以上屬性的圖像。而且,屬性會依圖像而有不同。此外,所謂質感,係指材質感、光澤感、透明感、蓬鬆感、濕潤感等包含於圖像之對象的質感。又,所謂遠近感,也可說是解像感、立體感、縱深感、空氣感等。 The second image is, for example, an image in which the load on the brain can be further reduced as compared with the first image when viewing is performed. Further, the second image is an image in which the load of the brain is generally reduced as compared with the first image when the object is recognized. The image that can reduce the load on the brain is that the brain can feel texture, distance, presence, presence, weight, warmth, coolness, speed, sensation, smooth movement. An image of one or more attributes in the sense of sex, freshness, and sense of quality. Also, the properties will vary depending on the image. In addition, the texture refers to the texture of the object included in the image such as the texture, the gloss, the transparency, the fluffiness, and the moist feeling. Moreover, the so-called sense of distance can also be said to be a sense of resolution, a sense of three-dimensionality, a sense of depth, and a sense of air.

此外,所謂可減低腦部負荷的圖像,也可改說成可讓腦部感受到舒適的圖像。 In addition, the image that can reduce the brain load can also be said to be an image that allows the brain to feel comfortable.

再者,相較於1個以上第一圖像,可減低腦部負荷的1個以上第二圖像,係為例如在與個以上第一圖像不同的環境所取得的1個以上圖像。亦即,在此情況中,例如1個以上第二圖像取得圖像之環境係與1個以上第一圖像不同。 Further, one or more second images that can reduce the brain load compared to one or more first images are, for example, one or more images acquired in an environment different from the one or more first images. . That is, in this case, for example, the environment in which one or more second image acquisition images are different from one or more first images.

所謂第一圖像,係例如在一個環境所得之有關一個對象的圖像。再者,所謂第二圖像,係例如在另一環境所得之有關前述一個對象的圖像。此外,所謂第一圖像,例如在一個環境對一個對象進行拍攝所得之圖像。而且,所謂第二圖像,例如在另一環境對前述一個對象進行拍攝所得之圖像。再者,在此情況中,第二圖像和第一圖像通常為相同畫素數,但亦可為不同畫素數。此外,所謂拍攝一個對象所得之圖像,亦可為等於對一個對象進行拍攝而製作出來的圖像。 The first image is, for example, an image of an object obtained in an environment. Furthermore, the second image is, for example, an image obtained in another environment relating to the aforementioned one object. Further, the first image is, for example, an image obtained by photographing an object in an environment. Further, the second image is, for example, an image obtained by photographing the aforementioned one object in another environment. Furthermore, in this case, the second image and the first image are usually the same number of pixels, but may also be different pixel numbers. In addition, an image obtained by capturing an object may be an image created by shooting an object.

此外,所謂另一環境,係為與一個環境不同的環境,且為可以拍攝到比一個環境更符合目的之圖像的環境。而且,所謂另一環境,係為例如可拍攝到比一個環境更能減低腦負荷之圖像的環境。再者,所謂另一環境,可為例如像下列(1)至(9)的環境。(1)照明(光源)之光量比一個環境多的環境、(2)與一個環境相比較,其光源位置能夠清楚表現出圖像上之物件影子的環境、(3)與一個環境相比較,其光源位置能夠清楚表現出圖像上之物件立體感的環境、(4)與一個環境相比較,其攝影機位置能夠清楚表現出 圖像上之物件立體感的環境、(5)照明顏色與一個環境不同的環境、(6)天候與一個環境不同的環境、(7)温度或者濕度與一個環境不同的環境、(8)景深與一個環境不同的環境、(9)快門速度與一個環境不同的環境等。 In addition, the other environment is an environment different from an environment, and is an environment in which an image more suitable for an environment can be captured. Moreover, the other environment is, for example, an environment in which an image capable of reducing brain load is more than one environment. Further, the other environment may be, for example, an environment like the following (1) to (9). (1) The illumination (light source) has more light than an environment, and (2) compared with an environment, the position of the light source can clearly show the environment of the shadow of the object on the image, and (3) compared with an environment. The position of the light source can clearly show the environment of the three-dimensionality of the object on the image, and (4) the position of the camera can be clearly displayed compared with an environment. The environment in which the object is three-dimensional, (5) the environment in which the lighting color is different from the environment, (6) the environment in which the weather is different from the environment, (7) the environment in which the temperature or humidity is different from the environment, and (8) the depth of field. An environment different from an environment, (9) a shutter speed and an environment different from the environment.

亦即,就一個環境和另一環境上,例如光量、光源位置、光源顏色、攝影機位置、攝影機設定等的拍攝環境並不相同。再者,所謂環境,通常係指拍攝環境,但只要是有關於取得圖像之環境,則任何環境均可。 That is, the shooting environment is different for one environment and another environment, such as the amount of light, the position of the light source, the color of the light source, the position of the camera, the setting of the camera, and the like. In addition, the environment generally refers to a shooting environment, but any environment may be used as long as it has an environment for acquiring images.

此外,第二圖像並不包含僅有畫素數較第一圖像為多的圖像。這種僅是畫素數較多的圖像,係為單純以畫素數較多的攝影機(例如HD攝影機)拍攝所得之圖像作為規範的圖像,另一方面,本發明之適於讓腦部感受的圖像係為以腦部之判斷、腦部之感受方式(亦可稱為人的感受方式)作為規範的圖像,兩者有一線之隔。 In addition, the second image does not include an image having only a larger number of pixels than the first image. Such an image having only a large number of pixels is simply a picture taken by a camera having a large number of pixels (for example, an HD camera) as a standard image. On the other hand, the present invention is suitable for The image of the brain is determined by the judgment of the brain and the way of feeling of the brain (also known as the way of feeling of the human being) as a standard image, which is separated by a line.

相對於第一圖像,經調整腦負荷之第二圖像,亦包含例如娛樂性比第一圖像更為提昇的圖像。娛樂性提昇的圖像,對於喜好娛樂性的使用者而言,係為適於讓腦部感受的圖像。所謂適於讓腦部感受的圖像,亦可稱之為腦部可享受刺激的圖像。而且,娛樂性提昇之複數個圖像(影像),係為例如局部插入有閃亮畫面(flash picture如閃光燈拍攝)之影像。 The second image of the adjusted brain load relative to the first image also includes, for example, an image that is more entertaining than the first image. An entertaining image is an image that is suitable for entertaining users and is suitable for the brain to feel. An image suitable for the brain to feel is also called an image in which the brain can enjoy stimulation. Moreover, the plurality of images (images) that are improved in entertainment are, for example, images in which a flashing picture (flash picture such as a flash shot) is partially inserted.

此外,經調整腦負荷之第二圖像,若為娛樂性比第一圖像提昇之圖像時,此種第二圖像雖能使人更享受腦部的刺激,但也會有腦部負荷更為増加的情形。 In addition, if the second image of the adjusted brain load is an image that is more entertaining than the first image, the second image can make the brain more stimulating, but also has a brain. The load is even more complicated.

再者,相較於第一圖像,經依目的而調整腦負荷之第二圖像,係為例如相對於拍攝一個對象所得之第一圖像,將該第一圖像變形後的圖像。將第一圖像變形所得的第二圖像,係為例如攝入第一圖像之人物的肖像圖像。肖像圖像等變形後之圖像,對於使用者而言,容易辨識對象,且可說是在認知對象之際,得以減低腦負荷的方式予以調整的圖像。 Furthermore, the second image that adjusts the brain load according to the purpose compared to the first image is, for example, an image obtained by deforming the first image with respect to the first image obtained by capturing an object. . The second image obtained by deforming the first image is, for example, a portrait image of a person who takes in the first image. An image obtained by deforming a portrait image or the like is easy for the user to recognize the object, and can be said to be an image that is adjusted in such a manner that the brain load is reduced when the subject is recognized.

而且,相較於第一圖像,經依目的而調整腦負荷之第二圖像,係為例如相對於拍攝一個對象所得之第一圖像,對描寫同一個對象的繪畫進行拍攝所得之圖像。透過描寫對象,對象所具有之概念表現容易瞭解。亦即,相較於直接拍攝對象所得之圖像,將描寫對象之繪畫進行拍攝的圖像,可說是為較可減低腦負荷之調整腦負荷的圖像。 Further, the second image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose is compared with the first image, for example, a picture obtained by drawing a picture depicting the same object with respect to the first image obtained by photographing one object. image. By describing the object, the concept of the object is easy to understand. In other words, an image in which a painting of a subject is photographed is compared with an image obtained by directly photographing a subject, and is an image that adjusts the brain load to reduce brain load.

同時,相較於第一圖像,經依目的而調整腦負荷的第二圖像,係為例如相對於拍攝一個對象所得之第一圖像,為該第一圖像之CG圖像。依據對象,相較於拍攝圖像,CG圖像可說是為較可減低腦負荷之調整腦負荷的圖像。 Meanwhile, the second image that adjusts the brain load according to the purpose compared to the first image is, for example, a CG image of the first image with respect to the first image obtained by photographing one object. Depending on the subject, the CG image can be said to be an image that adjusts the brain load to reduce brain load compared to the captured image.

而且,對應資訊係為例如第一圖像相關資訊和第二圖像相關資訊的組對。第一圖像相關資訊係為有關1個或2個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分的資訊。第二圖像相關資訊係為有關1個或2個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分的資訊。第一圖像相關資訊為例如從1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分抽出的1個以上特徵量。另外,第二圖像相關資訊係為例如1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分。此外,第二圖像相關資訊為例如產生1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分的演算式。同時,第二圖像相關資訊係為例如放入到用以產生1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分的演算式之參數群組對。在此種情形中,演算式係由映射部107所保存。又,從圖像抽出之1個以上特徵量中具有例如為1個以上圖像之一部分特徵量的近傍特徵量、及為1個以上圖像整體之特徵量的整體特徵量。近傍特徵量中具有例如畫素值、活性值、時空間相關性、移動向量、頻率分布等。再者,所謂活性值(activity)為例如複數個畫素之最大值及最小值、動態範圍(dynamic range,DR)、複數個畫素間之差分值等。複數個畫素間之差分值,可為空間內之複數畫素間之差分值,亦可為時間方向之複數畫素間之差分值,也可為空間內及時間方向之複數畫素間的差分值。此外,整體特徵量為例如圖像整體之畫素值分布、圖像整體之移動向量分布、1個或2個以上圖像整體之時空間相關性、圖像整體之雜訊量、圖像格式有關圖像整體之編輯的資訊(是否為PinP、是否為PoutP、有無字幕等)、有關為1個以上圖像之內容的內容資訊、圖案檢測結果(臉部等)。此處,所謂內容資訊,係為例如電子節目表(EPG)所具有的節目的類型、標題、演員姓名等。此外,也將1個以上特徵量權稱作特徵量向量。 Moreover, the correspondence information is, for example, a pair of the first image related information and the second image related information. The first image related information is information about all or a part of one or more first images. The second image related information is information about all or a part of one or more second images. The first image related information is, for example, one or more feature quantities extracted from all or part of one or more first images. Further, the second image related information is, for example, all or a part of one or more second images. Further, the second image related information is, for example, a calculation formula that generates all or a part of one or more second images. At the same time, the second image related information is, for example, a parameter group pair placed into a calculation formula for generating all or a part of one or more second images. In this case, the calculation formula is held by the mapping unit 107. Further, among the one or more feature quantities extracted from the image, for example, a near feature quantity of one feature number of one or more images and an overall feature quantity of a feature quantity of one or more images as a whole are included. The near 傍 feature quantity has, for example, a pixel value, an activity value, a temporal space correlation, a motion vector, a frequency distribution, and the like. Further, the activity value is, for example, a maximum value and a minimum value of a plurality of pixels, a dynamic range (DR), a difference value between a plurality of pixels, and the like. The difference between a plurality of pixels can be the difference between the complex pixels in the space, or the difference between the complex pixels in the time direction, or between the complex pixels in the space and in the time direction. Differential value. Further, the overall feature amount is, for example, a pixel value distribution of the entire image, a motion vector distribution of the entire image, a temporal spatial correlation of one or more images as a whole, a noise amount of the entire image, and an image format. Information about the editing of the entire image (whether it is PinP, whether it is PoutP, whether or not there is a subtitle, etc.), content information about the content of one or more images, and pattern detection results (faces, etc.). Here, the content information is, for example, a type, a title, an actor name, and the like of a program included in an electronic program guide (EPG). Further, one or more feature amount weights are also referred to as feature quantity vectors.

儲存部101雖以非揮發性儲存媒體較合適,但亦可用揮發性儲存媒體來實現。特別是,儲存部101較佳為非揮發性RAM。此外,查找表儲存在儲存部101之過程並非所問。例如,可藉由儲存媒體使查找表儲存 在儲存部101,也可使經由通信線路等傳送之查找表儲存在儲存部101,或者,也可使藉由輸入裝置輸入之查找表儲存在儲存部101。 Although the storage unit 101 is preferably a non-volatile storage medium, it can also be realized by a volatile storage medium. In particular, the storage unit 101 is preferably a non-volatile RAM. Further, the process of storing the lookup table in the storage section 101 is not a question. For example, the lookup table can be stored by the storage medium. In the storage unit 101, a lookup table transmitted via a communication line or the like may be stored in the storage unit 101, or a lookup table input by the input device may be stored in the storage unit 101.

限制條件儲存部102得以儲存限制條件。所謂限制條件,係為有關圖像處理裝置1之任一處理的條件。所謂有關處理的條件,係為例如相對於作為處理對象之圖像(輸入圖像)之全部或一部的條件。再者,所謂有關處理的條件,係為例如有關利用於處理之查找表的條件。而且,所謂有關處理的條件,係為例如有關輸出圖像的條件。所稱限制條件,可說是輸入圖像、對應資訊、或輸出圖像中之1種以上資訊應滿足的條件。而且,所謂相對於作為處理對象之圖像(輸入圖像)之全部或一部的條件,係為例如以處理對象之1個以上特徵量(例如亮度、畫素值等)作為參數的條件。相對於輸入圖像之全部或一部的條件係指例如畫素值未逸離正常範圍之意。此外,畫素值之正常範圍係預先予以儲存。再者,所稱有關查找表之條件,係為例如關於查找表所具有之對應資訊的選擇頻度等之選擇條件。有關查找表之條件係指例如不使用和剛剛用過之對應資訊相同的對應資訊之意。同時,有關查找表的條件係指例如在第一特定條件下連續地使用相同對應資訊的情形、在第二特定條件下固定使用特定對應資訊的情形、在第三特定條件下不連續使用相同對應資訊的情形、在第四特定條件下不使用特定對應資訊的情形等。而且,例如所謂有關輸出圖像之條件,係為以輸出圖像之1個以上特徵量(例如亮度、畫素值等)作為參數之條件。所謂有關輸出圖像之條件,可說是映射部107所取得之1個以上第二圖像的全部或一部分應滿足的限制條件。有關輸出圖像之條件係為例如活性值在臨介值以內的情形。再者,有關輸出圖像之條件係為例如畫素之最大值「畫素之值<=255」、畫素之最小值「畫素值>=10」、關於畫素值之變化△的「畫素亮度的時間性變化<=100」、動態範圍「DR<=200」等。限制條件亦可嵌入於執行圖像處理之程式中,應無庸置疑。 The restriction condition storage unit 102 can store the restriction condition. The restriction condition is a condition relating to any processing of the image processing apparatus 1. The conditions relating to the processing are, for example, conditions for all or one part of the image (input image) to be processed. Further, the condition regarding the processing is, for example, a condition relating to a lookup table used for processing. Further, the condition regarding the processing is, for example, a condition relating to an output image. The so-called restriction condition can be said to be a condition that one or more kinds of information in the input image, the corresponding information, or the output image should satisfy. In addition, the condition of all or one part of the image (input image) to be processed is a condition in which one or more feature quantities (for example, luminance, pixel value, and the like) of the processing target are used as parameters. The condition with respect to all or a part of the input image means that, for example, the pixel value does not escape the normal range. In addition, the normal range of pixel values is stored in advance. Further, the condition for referring to the lookup table is, for example, a selection condition regarding the selection frequency of the corresponding information of the lookup table or the like. The condition for the lookup table means, for example, that the same information as the corresponding information that has just been used is not used. Meanwhile, the condition regarding the lookup table refers to, for example, a case where the same corresponding information is continuously used under the first specific condition, a case where the specific corresponding information is fixedly used under the second specific condition, and the same correspondence is discontinuously used under the third specific condition. The situation of the information, the case where the specific corresponding information is not used under the fourth specific condition, and the like. Further, for example, the condition for outputting an image is a condition in which one or more feature quantities (for example, luminance, pixel value, and the like) of the output image are used as parameters. The condition regarding the output image can be said to be a constraint condition that all or a part of one or more second images acquired by the mapping unit 107 should satisfy. The condition regarding the output image is, for example, the case where the activity value is within the median value. Further, the condition for outputting the image is, for example, the maximum value of the pixel "the value of the pixel <= 255", the minimum value of the pixel "pixel value>=10", and the change of the pixel value △" The temporal change of pixel brightness is <=100", and the dynamic range is "DR<=200". Restrictions can also be embedded in the program that performs image processing, and there is no doubt about it.

再者,限制條件亦可包含相對於輸入圖像之全部或一部分的條件、有關查找表之條件、有關輸出圖像之條件中的2種以上條件。此種限制條件係例如輸入圖像之畫素值和輸出圖像之畫素值的差大於臨限值的情形。此外,臨限值係預先予以儲存。 Further, the restriction condition may include two or more conditions in terms of conditions of all or a part of the input image, conditions of the lookup table, and conditions regarding the output image. Such a constraint is such as the case where the difference between the pixel value of the input image and the pixel value of the output image is greater than the threshold value. In addition, the threshold is stored in advance.

限制條件儲存部102較佳為非揮發性儲存媒體。亦可用揮發性儲存媒體來實現。限制條件儲存於限制條件儲存部102之過程並非所問。例如,可藉由儲存媒體使限制條件儲存於限制條件儲存部102、使藉由通訊線路等傳送之限制條件儲存於限制條件儲存部102、或者使藉由輸入裝置輸入之限制條件儲存於限制條件儲存部102。 The restriction storage unit 102 is preferably a non-volatile storage medium. It can also be implemented with a volatile storage medium. The process of storing the restriction condition in the restriction condition storage unit 102 is not a question. For example, the restriction condition may be stored in the restriction condition storage unit 102 by the storage medium, the restriction condition transmitted by the communication line or the like may be stored in the restriction condition storage unit 102, or the restriction condition input by the input device may be stored in the restriction condition. The storage unit 102.

指示受理部103係受理指示。該指示可從使用者受理,可從外部之儲存媒體讀取,也可從外部裝置接收。而且,該指示也可嵌入於從廣播裝置傳送之廣播訊號中。此外,指示係為變更查找表俾符合使用者之喜好等的指示。指示包含例如圖像立體感之程度。再者,指示係為例如從正在輸出的1個以上各第二圖像資訊候補集合所具有之2個以上第二圖像的候補中,選擇1個以上第二圖像之候補的指示。這種選擇為選擇符合使用者喜好之圖像的指示。同時,指示亦可包含例如年齡或年齡層(30歲世代、60歲世代等)、性別、有無近視或老花-障礙調節等使用者屬性。此外,指示為例如目的或課題或喜好。目的或課題或喜好則有「由於不容易看見圖像,所以希望能看得更清楚」、「圖像太暗,不容意看見」「希望看到更棒的畫」等例子。總之,指示可有各種內容或種類。 The instruction accepting unit 103 accepts the instruction. The indication can be received from the user, read from an external storage medium, or received from an external device. Moreover, the indication can also be embedded in the broadcast signal transmitted from the broadcaster. In addition, the indication is an instruction to change the lookup table to suit the user's preference or the like. The indication includes, for example, the degree of stereoscopicity of the image. Further, the instruction is, for example, an instruction to select one or more candidates for the second image from the candidates of the two or more second images included in the one or more second image information candidate sets being output. This choice is an indication of an image that matches the user's preferences. At the same time, the indication may also include user attributes such as age or age (30 generations, 60 generations, etc.), gender, presence or absence of myopia, or presbyopia-disorder adjustment. Further, the indication is, for example, an object or a subject or a preference. For the purpose or subject or preference, there are examples such as "I don't want to see the image, so I hope I can see it more clearly", "The image is too dark, I don't want to see it", "I hope to see a better picture". In summary, the instructions can have a variety of content or categories.

其次,所謂受理包含由遙控器或鍵盤或滑鼠、觸控面板等輸入裝置所輸入之資訊的受理、經由有線或無線通訊線路傳送之資訊的接收、從光碟或磁碟、半導體記憶體等儲存媒體讀取之資訊的受理等概念。指示之輸入裝置可利用遙控器或九宮格或鍵盤或滑鼠或選單畫面等,任一種均可。指示受理部103可用數字健盤或鍵盤等輸入裝置之裝置驅動器或、選單畫面之控制軟體等來實現。 Secondly, it accepts reception of information input by an input device such as a remote controller or a keyboard, a mouse, a touch panel, etc., reception of information transmitted via a wired or wireless communication line, storage from a disc or a magnetic disk, a semiconductor memory, or the like. The concept of acceptance of information read by the media. The input device of the indication may be any one of a remote control or a nine-square grid or a keyboard or a mouse or a menu screen. The instruction accepting unit 103 can be realized by a device driver of an input device such as a digital keyboard or a keyboard, a control software for a menu screen, or the like.

圖像受理部104係受理圖像。同時,圖像受理部104也可受理為1個以上圖像之集合的影像。此處,所謂圖像,可為一個靜態畫、也可為由2個以上靜態畫所構成之動畫。圖像受理部104可由例如電視調諧器(television tuner)、或者無線或有線接收裝置等來實現。此外,所謂圖像之受理也可從儲存媒體讀取圖像等。亦即,不問其受理圖像之裝置為何。 The image receiving unit 104 accepts an image. At the same time, the image receiving unit 104 can accept an image of a set of one or more images. Here, the image may be a static picture or an animation composed of two or more still pictures. The image accepting unit 104 can be realized by, for example, a television tuner or a wireless or wired receiving device. Further, the image reception can also read an image or the like from the storage medium. That is, regardless of the device that accepts the image.

分割部105係將圖像受理部104所受理之圖像(靜態畫、動畫均可)依空間性、或時間性、或空間性及時間性分割成2個以上,以取得2個 以上第一時空區塊。此外,如上所述,分割圖像所取得之複數個時空區塊也可包含重複的區域。而且,如上所述,分割圖像所取得之複數個時空區塊不限於矩形的連續區域。時空區塊亦可為非矩形且不連續圖像之區域。而且,分割部105可例如將1畫面(1圖場或1圖框即frame影格)分割為4個,也可將n個畫面(n為2個以上的整數)分割為8個。此外,分割的數目並非所問。再者,分割部105亦可從圖像中一個一個地取得畫素,再傳遞到圖像解析部106。亦即,時空區塊也可為1個畫素。 The division unit 105 divides the image (still image or animation) accepted by the image reception unit 104 into two or more depending on the spatiality, temporality, spatiality, and temporality to obtain two images. The first time and space block above. Further, as described above, the plurality of spatiotemporal blocks obtained by dividing the image may also include repeated regions. Moreover, as described above, the plurality of spatiotemporal blocks obtained by dividing the image are not limited to the continuous region of the rectangle. Space-time blocks can also be areas of non-rectangular and discontinuous images. Further, the division unit 105 may divide, for example, one screen (one map field or one frame, that is, a frame frame) into four, or may divide n screens (n is an integer of two or more) into eight. In addition, the number of divisions is not what is asked. Furthermore, the division unit 105 can also acquire pixels from the image one by one and pass it to the image analysis unit 106. That is, the space-time block can also be 1 pixel.

分割部105通常可由MPU或記憶體等來實現。分割部105之處理程序通常係以軟體來實現,該軟體係儲存於ROM等儲存媒體。但也可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The dividing unit 105 can be generally realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the dividing unit 105 is usually implemented by software, and the soft system is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. But it can also be implemented with hardware (dedicated circuit).

圖像解析部106係用以決定與圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應之第一圖像之全部或一部分。例如,圖像解析部106也可按分割部105所取得之2個以上各第一時空區塊之每個,來決定與各第一時空區塊相對應之第一圖像的全部或一部分。另外,圖像解析部106也可決定2個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分。 The image analysis unit 106 is configured to determine all or part of the first image corresponding to all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit 104. For example, the image analysis unit 106 may determine all or part of the first image corresponding to each of the first spatiotemporal blocks in accordance with each of the two or more first spatiotemporal blocks acquired by the dividing unit 105. Further, the image analysis unit 106 may determine all or part of the two or more first images.

再者,例如,圖像解析部106會對圖像受理部104所受理之圖像、或分割部105所取得之2個以上各第一時空區塊進行解析,並取得1個以上特徵量,且決定與1個以上特徵量相對應之第一圖像之全部或一部分。此處,所謂1個以上特徵量,係為例如上述之近傍特徵量、整體特徵量中之1個以上特徵量。此外,圖像解析部106也可只是解析圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分,以取得1個以上特徵量的處理。此外,圖像解析部106取得之特徵量較佳為包含整體特徵量與近傍特徵量兩者。 In addition, for example, the image analysis unit 106 analyzes the image received by the image accepting unit 104 or the two or more first spatiotemporal blocks acquired by the dividing unit 105, and acquires one or more feature quantities. And determining all or a part of the first image corresponding to one or more feature quantities. Here, the one or more feature amounts are, for example, one or more feature amounts of the above-described near-characteristic feature amount and overall feature amount. In addition, the image analysis unit 106 may analyze only one or more of the one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit 104 to acquire one or more feature amounts. Further, it is preferable that the feature amount obtained by the image analysis unit 106 includes both the total feature amount and the near feature value.

而且,決定與1個以上特徵量相對應之第一圖像之全部或一部分的處理,係為例如計算所取得之特徵量向量、和各對應資訊所具有之第一圖像之全部或一部分的特徵量向量的距離,以取得與該距離為最小之第一圖像之全部或一部分的特徵量向量相對應之參數群、或演算式等的處理。 Further, the process of determining all or a part of the first image corresponding to one or more feature amounts is, for example, calculating the acquired feature amount vector and all or a part of the first image of each corresponding information. The distance of the feature quantity vector is a process of obtaining a parameter group, a calculation formula, or the like corresponding to the feature quantity vector of all or a part of the first image having the smallest distance.

又,決定與1個以上特徵量相對應之第一圖像之全部或一部分的處理,係為例如從所取得之特徵量向量來計算查找表位址的處理。此外, 計算查找表位址的處理係為將特徵量向量代入已預先儲存之演算式中進行演算的處理。 Further, the process of determining all or a part of the first image corresponding to one or more feature amounts is, for example, a process of calculating a lookup table address from the acquired feature amount vector. In addition, The process of calculating the lookup table address is a process of substituting the feature quantity vector into a pre-stored calculation formula for calculation.

圖像解析部106通常可由MPU或記憶體等來實現。圖像解析部106之處理程序通常可以軟體來實現,該軟體係儲存於ROM等儲存媒體。但,亦可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The image analysis unit 106 can be generally realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the image analysis unit 106 can be realized by software, and the soft system is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. However, it can also be implemented by hardware (dedicated circuit).

映射部107係使用查找表中之1個或2個以上對應資訊中之任一對應資訊,來取得與圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應的1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分。同時,例如,映射部107會使用與圖像解析部106所決定的第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊(亦包含使用對應資訊之一部分(例如參數群)的情況),來取得與圖像解析部106所決定的第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的第二圖像之全部或一部分,作為輸出圖像之全部或一部分。映射部107會例如取得要放入與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應之對應資訊所具有的演算式的參數群,進行演算,而產生與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的第二圖像之全部或一部分。而且,映射部107會例如從對應資訊取得與圖像解析部106所決定的第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊所具有的第二圖像之全部或一部分。 The mapping unit 107 acquires one or more corresponding to all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit 104 by using one of the one or more pieces of corresponding information in the lookup table. All or part of the second image. At the same time, for example, the mapping unit 107 obtains the corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analyzing unit 106 (including the case where one part of the corresponding information (for example, a parameter group) is used). All or part of the second image corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit 106 is used as all or part of the output image. The mapping unit 107 acquires, for example, a parameter group of a calculation formula to be included in the corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit 106, and performs calculation to generate an image analysis unit. All or a portion of the second image corresponding to all or a portion of the first image determined by 106. Further, the mapping unit 107 acquires all or a part of the second image included in the correspondence information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analyzing unit 106, for example, from the correspondence information.

映射部107也可執行第一動作、或第二動作中之一個動作。此處,所謂第一動作,係為使用圖像解析部106所取得之1個以上特徵量,來選擇相較於圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像,可輸出經以更符合目的之方式調整腦負荷之圖像之1個以上對應資訊的動作。再者,所謂第二動作,係為選擇相較於圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像,可輸出經以更符合目的之方式調整腦負荷之圖像的查找表及1個以上對應資訊的動作。 The mapping unit 107 can also perform one of the first action or the second action. Here, the first operation is to select one or more types of features acquired by the image analyzing unit 106, and to select one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit 104, and the output can be more consistent. The purpose is to adjust the action of one or more corresponding information of the brain load image. In addition, the second operation is to select one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit 104, and to output a lookup table and one or more images for adjusting the brain load more purposefully. The action corresponding to the information.

接著,映射部107也可使用該選擇之1個以上對應資訊,來取得與圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應的1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分。 Next, the mapping unit 107 may acquire all or more of the one or more second images corresponding to all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image accepting unit 104, using the selected one or more pieces of corresponding information. portion.

再者,映射部107亦可執行第三動作、或第四動作中之一個動作。此處,所謂第三動作,係使用圖像解析部106所取得之1個以上特徵 量,來選擇相較於圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像,可輸出經以更符合目的之方式調整腦負荷之圖像的2個以上對應資訊的動作。又,所謂第四動作,係為選擇相較於圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像,可輸出經以更符合目的之方式調整腦負荷之圖像的查找表及2個以上對應資訊的動作。 Furthermore, the mapping unit 107 may perform one of the third operation or the fourth operation. Here, the third operation uses one or more features acquired by the image analysis unit 106. In order to select one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit 104, it is possible to output an operation of adjusting two or more pieces of corresponding information of an image of a brain load more purposefully. In addition, the fourth operation is to select a lookup table and two or more corresponding images that adjust the brain load in a more suitable manner than one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit 104. The action of information.

接著,映射部107亦可使用該選擇之2個以上對應資訊,來取得1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分。此外,使用2個以上對應資訊取得1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分時,映射部107亦可使用2個以上各對應資訊來處理圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分,並將經該處理之2個以上結果融合,以取得1個以上第二圖像的全部或一部分。同時,使用2個以上對應資訊來取得1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分時,映射部107亦可使用2個以上對應資訊來產生新的對應資訊,並使用該新的對應資訊來取得1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分。此外,上述之所謂2個以上結果之融合,係為例如使用圖像之2個以上屬性之兩者來產生圖像之情形、或者產生帶有2個以上屬性之中間性質的圖像之情形等。 Next, the mapping unit 107 may acquire all or part of one or more second images using the selected two or more pieces of corresponding information. Further, when all or part of one or more second images are acquired using two or more pieces of corresponding information, the mapping unit 107 may process one or more images accepted by the image accepting unit 104 using two or more pieces of corresponding information. All or part of the result, and the two or more results of the process are combined to obtain all or part of one or more second images. Meanwhile, when all or part of one or more second images are acquired using two or more pieces of corresponding information, the mapping unit 107 may generate new corresponding information using two or more pieces of corresponding information, and obtain the new corresponding information using the corresponding information. All or part of one or more second images. Further, the fusion of the above-mentioned two or more results is, for example, a case where an image is generated using two or more attributes of an image, or an image having an intermediate property of two or more attributes. .

映射部107亦可按2個以上各第一時空區塊之每個,使用與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊(亦包含使用對應資訊之一部分的情形)來取得第二時空區塊。此外,該第二時空區塊係為與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的第二時空區塊。 The mapping unit 107 may use corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analyzing unit 106 for each of the two or more first spatiotemporal blocks (including a part of the corresponding information). The situation) to obtain the second space-time block. Further, the second spatiotemporal block is a second spatiotemporal block corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analyzing unit 106.

再者,映射部107係取得例如要放入與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應之對應資訊所具有的演算式的參數群,進行演算,以取得與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的第二時空區塊。而且,映射部107係從對應資訊取得例如與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊所具有之第二圖像的全部或一部分(第二時空區塊)。 Further, the mapping unit 107 acquires, for example, a parameter group of a calculation formula to be included in the correspondence information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit 106, and performs calculation to obtain the map. A second space-time block corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the analysis unit 106. Further, the mapping unit 107 acquires, for example, all or a part of the second image included in the corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analyzing unit 106 from the corresponding information (second space-time block) ).

此外,映射部107也可在取得第二圖像之全部或一部分後進行修正處理。修正處理係為由映射部107使用圖像受理部104所受理之圖像的全部或一部分的特徵量、和對應資訊所具有之第一圖像之全部或一部分 的特徵量,來修正第二圖像之全部或一部分的處理。再者,修正取得之圖像亦可稱為第二圖像,也可稱作輸出圖像。修正處理係為例如映射部107取得圖像受理部104所受理之圖像的全部或一部分的特徵量、和對應資訊所具有之第一圖像的全部或一部分之特徵量的差分,並使用該差分來修正第二圖像之全部或一部分,使輸出圖像之全部或一部分更符合圖像受理部104所受理之圖像的全部或一部分的修正處理。 Further, the mapping unit 107 may perform correction processing after acquiring all or a part of the second image. The correction processing is performed by the mapping unit 107 using all or a part of the feature amount of the image accepted by the image accepting unit 104 and all or a part of the first image included in the corresponding information. The feature quantity is used to correct the processing of all or part of the second image. Furthermore, the image obtained by the correction may also be referred to as a second image, and may also be referred to as an output image. In the correction processing, for example, the mapping unit 107 acquires the difference between the feature amount of all or a part of the image received by the image accepting unit 104 and the feature amount of all or a part of the first image included in the corresponding information, and uses the difference. All or part of the second image is corrected by the difference, and all or a part of the output image is more in line with the correction processing of all or part of the image accepted by the image receiving unit 104.

映射部107通常可由MPU或記憶體等來實現。映射部107之處理程序通常係以軟體來實現,該軟體為儲存於ROM等儲存媒體。但亦可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The mapping unit 107 can be generally implemented by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the mapping unit 107 is usually implemented by software, which is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. But it can also be implemented with hardware (dedicated circuit).

以下,說明有關映射部107具備種類識別符取得裝置1071、輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072、判斷裝置1073、變更裝置1074、及輸出圖像取得裝置1075之情形。此外,映射部107也有不具備種類識別符取得裝置1071、輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072、判斷裝置1073、變更裝置1074、以及輸出圖像取得裝置1075的情形。 Hereinafter, the case where the mapping unit 107 includes the type identifier acquiring means 1071, the output image candidate obtaining means 1072, the determining means 1073, the changing means 1074, and the output image obtaining means 1075 will be described. Further, the mapping unit 107 does not include the case where the type identifier acquiring means 1071, the output image candidate obtaining means 1072, the determining means 1073, the changing means 1074, and the output image obtaining means 1075 are not provided.

構成映射部107之種類識別符取得裝置1071係取得用以識別要利用的查找表種類之1個或2個以上種類識別符。種類識別符取得裝置1071在例如使種類識別符與圖像之全部或一部分的1個以上特徵量相對應,並儲存於儲存部101時,可取得圖像受理部104所受理圖像之全部或一部分的1個以上特徵量,並決定與該1個以上特徵量最近似的1個以上特徵量,然後從儲存部101取得與該1個以上特徵量相對應之種類識別符。而且,種類識別符取得裝置1071也可將包含於未圖示之EPG儲存部中所儲存之EPG(電子節目表)之節目(輸出中節目)的類型當作種類識別符。而且,種類識別符取得裝置1071也可將由使用者受理之種類識別符儲存於未圖示之儲存媒體,再取得這種種類識別符。此外,種類識別符取得裝置1071係取得例如和指示受理部103所受理之指示相對應之1個以上種類識別符。例如,指示受理部103受理與「由於圖像不容易看見,所以希望能看得更清楚」相對應之目的時,種類識別符取得裝置1071可取得識別減低雜訊之查找表的種類的種類識別符;又、例如,指示受理部103受理與「由於圖像不容易看見,所以希望能看得更清楚」相對應之目的時,種類識別符取得裝置 1071也可取得用以識別使照明環境明亮化的查找表之種類的種類識別符。而且,例如指示受理部103在受理與「由於不容易看見圖像,所以希望能看得更清楚」相對應之目的時,種類識別符取得裝置1071可取得減低雜訊之查找表的種類識別符、和使照明環境明亮化之查找表的種類識別符。 The type identifier acquiring means 1071 constituting the mapping unit 107 acquires one or two or more types of identifiers for identifying the type of the lookup table to be used. When the type identifier acquiring means 1071 associates the type identifier with one or more feature amounts of all or part of the image and stores it in the storage unit 101, it is possible to acquire all of the images accepted by the image accepting unit 104 or One or more feature amounts are determined, and one or more feature amounts closest to the one or more feature amounts are determined, and the type identifier corresponding to the one or more feature amounts is acquired from the storage unit 101. Further, the type identifier acquiring means 1071 may use the type of the program (output program) included in the EPG (Electronic Program Table) stored in the EPG storage unit (not shown) as the type identifier. Further, the type identifier acquiring means 1071 may store the type identifier accepted by the user in a storage medium (not shown) and acquire the type identifier. Further, the type identifier acquiring means 1071 acquires, for example, one or more types of identifiers corresponding to the instructions accepted by the instruction accepting unit 103. For example, when the instruction accepting unit 103 accepts the purpose corresponding to "the image is not easily seen, it is desirable to see it more clearly", the type identifier acquiring means 1071 can obtain the type identification of the type of the lookup table for identifying the noise reduction. Further, for example, the instruction accepting unit 103 accepts the object identifier obtaining means for the purpose corresponding to "the image is not easily seen because it is not easy to see," In 1071, a type identifier for identifying the type of the lookup table that brightens the lighting environment can be obtained. Further, for example, when the instruction accepting unit 103 accepts the object corresponding to "the image is not easily seen, it is desirable to see it more clearly", the type identifier acquiring means 1071 can obtain the type identifier of the lookup table for reducing the noise. And the type identifier of the lookup table that brightens the lighting environment.

再者,例如指示受理部103在受理與「由於不容易看見圖像,所以希望能看得更清楚」相對應之目的時,種類識別符取得裝置1071會檢測圖像中之雜訊,並檢知是否存在有臨限值以上之雜訊。在判斷到存在有臨限值以上之雜訊時,即取得減低雜訊之查找表的種類識別符。此外,例如指示受理部103在受理與「由於不容易看見圖像,所以希望能看得更清楚」相對應之目的時,種類識別符取得裝置1071會取得圖像亮度值之分布。也可在判斷為圖像之亮度分布暗到未滿足預先決定之條件時,即取得使照明環境明亮化之查找表的種類識別符。 In addition, for example, when the instruction accepting unit 103 accepts the object corresponding to "the image is not easily seen, it is desirable to see it more clearly", the type identifier acquiring means 1071 detects the noise in the image and checks it. Know if there is any noise above the threshold. When it is determined that there is a noise equal to or greater than the threshold, the type identifier of the lookup table for reducing the noise is obtained. Further, for example, when the instruction accepting unit 103 accepts the purpose corresponding to "the image is not easily seen, it is desirable to see it more clearly", the type identifier acquiring means 1071 obtains the distribution of the image luminance values. When it is determined that the luminance distribution of the image is dark enough to satisfy the predetermined condition, the type identifier of the lookup table for brightening the illumination environment may be obtained.

種類識別符取得裝置1071通常可由MPU或記憶體等來實現。種類識別符取得裝置1071之處理程序通常係以軟體來實現,該軟體則儲存於ROM等儲存媒體。但,亦可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The type identifier obtaining means 1071 can be generally realized by an MPU, a memory or the like. The processing program of the type identifier obtaining means 1071 is usually implemented by software, and the software is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. However, it can also be implemented by hardware (dedicated circuit).

輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072係使用與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像得全部或一部分相對應之對應資訊(即:亦可為對應資訊之一部份),取得與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像得全部或一部分相對應之第二圖像的全部或一部分。此處,所取得之第二圖像的全部或一部分係為輸出圖像之全部或一部分的候補。再者,所謂「取得第二圖像的全部或一部分」,係指使用例如要代入對應資訊所具有之演算式、或對應資訊所具有之演算式的參數的集合,並執行演算,以取得第二圖像之全部或一部分的情形。在此情況中,對應資訊具有產生與第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應之第二圖像的全部或一部分所需之演算式、或要代入演算式之參數的集合。同時,所謂「取得第二圖像之全部或一部分」亦可為,例如,取得包含於和圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊之第二圖像之全部或一部分的情形。 The output image candidate acquisition means 1072 uses the corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit 106 (that is, may be part of the corresponding information), and obtains and analyzes the image. The first image determined by the portion 106 has all or a portion of the second image corresponding to all or a portion of the first image. Here, all or part of the acquired second image is a candidate for all or part of the output image. In addition, "acquiring all or part of the second image" means using, for example, a set of parameters to be substituted into the calculation formula of the corresponding information or the calculation formula of the corresponding information, and performing calculation to obtain the first The case of all or part of the two images. In this case, the corresponding information has a set of equations required to generate all or a portion of the second image corresponding to all or a portion of the first image, or a set of parameters to be substituted into the formula. Meanwhile, the "acquiring all or part of the second image" may be, for example, acquiring the second image of the corresponding information included in all or a part of the first image determined by the image analyzing unit 106. All or part of the situation.

輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072通常可由MPU或記憶體等來實現。出圖像候補取得裝置1072之處理程序通常係用軟體來實現,該軟體則儲存於ROM等儲存媒體。但,也可以硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The output image candidate acquisition device 1072 can be generally realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the image candidate acquisition device 1072 is usually implemented by software, and the software is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. However, it can also be implemented by a hardware (dedicated circuit).

判斷裝置1073係判斷是否滿足限制條件。限制條件為對於作為處理對象之圖像的全部或一部分的條件時,判斷裝置1073會取得圖像受理部104所受理之圖像的全部或一部分的1個以上特徵量,來判斷該1個以上特徵量是否滿足限制條件。此外,限制條件為有關查找表的條件時,判斷裝置1073則取得有關查找表過去使用之資訊(對應於條件之使用歷史記錄)來判斷該使用歷史記錄是否滿足限制條件。此外,所謂使用歷史記錄,係為例如界定輸入圖像中之最近n個圖場(n為1以上的整數)的處理中所用之查找表之種類識別符、或輸入圖像中最近n個圖場(n為1以上的整數)的處理所用之對應資訊的資訊。此外,限制條件包含使用歷史記錄時,該使用歷史記錄係定義為假設積存、產生於映射部107所未圖示之儲存媒體。再者,限制條件為有關於輸出圖像之條件時,判斷裝置1073會對例如輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072所取得之第二圖像的全部或一部分是否滿足限制條件儲存部102的限制條件進行判斷。例如,判斷裝置1073會取得限制條件所包含之第二圖像的全部或一部分的屬性值(例如,畫素之最大值、畫素亮度之時間性變化),以判斷屬性值是否滿足限制條件(例如,「畫素5最大值<=255」、「畫素亮度的時間性變化<=100」)。 The judging means 1073 judges whether or not the restriction condition is satisfied. When the restriction condition is a condition of all or a part of the image to be processed, the determination device 1073 acquires one or more feature amounts of all or a part of the image accepted by the image reception unit 104, and determines one or more pieces. Whether the feature quantity satisfies the constraint. Further, when the restriction condition is a condition relating to the lookup table, the judging means 1073 obtains information on the past use of the lookup table (corresponding to the use history of the condition) to judge whether or not the use history record satisfies the restriction condition. Further, the usage history is, for example, a type identifier of a lookup table used in a process of defining the last n fields (n is an integer of 1 or more) in the input image, or the last n pictures in the input image. The information of the corresponding information used for the processing of the field (n is an integer of 1 or more). Further, when the restriction condition includes the usage history, the usage history is defined as a storage medium that is assumed to be accumulated and generated by the mapping unit 107. In addition, when the condition is that the condition of the image is output, the determination means 1073 performs, for example, whether or not all or a part of the second image acquired by the output image candidate acquisition means 1072 satisfies the restriction condition of the restriction condition storage unit 102. Judge. For example, the determining means 1073 obtains an attribute value (for example, a maximum value of the pixel and a temporal change of the pixel brightness) of all or a part of the second image included in the restriction condition to determine whether the attribute value satisfies the restriction condition ( For example, "Picture 5 maximum <= 255", "Time change of pixel brightness <= 100").

判斷裝置1073通常可由MPU或記憶體等來實現。判斷裝置1073之處理程序通常係用軟體來實現,該軟體係儲存於ROM等儲存媒體。但,也可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The judging means 1073 can usually be realized by an MPU or a memory or the like. The processing program of the judging device 1073 is usually implemented by software, and the soft system is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. However, it can also be implemented by hardware (dedicated circuit).

判斷裝置1073判斷為未滿足限制條件時,變更裝置1074會將第二圖像之全部或一部分進行變更。而且,判斷裝置1073判斷為未滿足限制條件時,變更裝置1074也可將查找表進行變更。 When the judging means 1073 determines that the restriction condition is not satisfied, the changing means 1074 changes all or part of the second image. Further, when the determination means 1073 determines that the restriction condition is not satisfied, the change means 1074 may change the lookup table.

再者,判斷裝置1073判斷為未滿足限制條件時,變更裝置1074也可將判斷後所受理之輸入圖像、或判斷後所得之時空區塊、或判斷後所受理之輸入圖像的1個以上特徵量、或判斷後所得之時空區塊的1個以上特徵量進行變更,以滿足限制條件。 When the determination means 1073 determines that the restriction condition is not satisfied, the changing means 1074 may determine the input image accepted after the determination, or the space-time block obtained after the determination, or one of the input images accepted after the determination. The above feature amount or one or more feature amounts of the space-time block obtained after the determination is changed to satisfy the restriction condition.

而且,判斷裝置1073判斷為未滿足限制條件時,變更裝置1074會例如將為判斷裝置1073之判斷對象的第二圖像的全部或一部分以滿足限制條件之方式進行變更,並取得變更圖像。此處,「以滿足限制條件之方式進行變更的處理」係例如以構成第二圖像之全部或一部分的複數個畫素之最大值符合限制條件(例如、「最大值<=255」)的方式,例如複數個畫素之最大值達255的方式,將該複數個畫素值作整體性壓縮的處理。此外,所謂整體性壓縮複數個畫素值之處理,係可用相同比例來縮小複數個畫素值,也可按照不同的比例或值的大小來縮小複數個畫素值。 When the determination device 1073 determines that the restriction condition is not satisfied, the changing device 1074 changes the image to the extent that the second image of the determination target of the determination device 1073 is satisfied, for example, and acquires the changed image. Here, the "processing to change the condition to satisfy the restriction condition" is, for example, that the maximum value of the plurality of pixels constituting all or part of the second image satisfies the restriction condition (for example, "maximum value <= 255") In a manner, for example, the maximum number of pixels of the plurality of pixels is 255, and the plurality of pixel values are processed as a whole. In addition, the so-called holistic compression of a plurality of pixel values can be used to reduce the number of pixel values by the same ratio, or to reduce the number of pixel values according to different ratios or values.

變更裝置1074通常可由MPU或記憶體等來實現。變更裝置1074之處理程序通常係用軟體來實現,該軟體係儲存於ROM等儲存媒體,但也可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The changing device 1074 can be generally implemented by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the changing device 1074 is usually implemented by software, which is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM, but can also be implemented by a hardware (dedicated circuit).

輸出圖像取得裝置1075係使用複數個對應資訊中與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應之對應資訊(主要意思是:亦可為對應資訊之一部份),來取得和圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的第二圖像的全部或一部分,以作為輸出圖像之全部或一部分。此處,上述所謂複數個對應資訊係為儲存部101之一個查找表的複數個對應資訊、或與1個或2個以上種類識別符相對應的1個或2個以上查找表所具有的複數個對應資訊。 The output image acquisition device 1075 uses corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit 106 among a plurality of pieces of corresponding information (mainly: may also be part of the corresponding information) All or part of the second image corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit 106 is obtained as all or part of the output image. Here, the above-mentioned plural correspondence information is a plurality of correspondence information of one lookup table of the storage unit 101 or plural numbers of one or two or more lookup tables corresponding to one or two or more types of identifiers. Corresponding information.

再者,輸出圖像取得裝置1075較佳為取得:判斷裝置1073判斷為滿足限制條件之第二圖像的全部或一部分、或變更裝置1074所取得之變更圖像、或判斷裝置1073判斷為滿足限制條件之第二圖像的全部或一部分及變更裝置1074所取得之變更圖像,當作輸出圖像之全部或一部分。 Further, the output image acquisition device 1075 preferably obtains: the determination device 1073 determines that all or a part of the second image satisfying the restriction condition, or the changed image acquired by the changing device 1074, or the determination device 1073 determines that the image is satisfied. All or part of the second image of the restriction condition and the changed image obtained by the changing device 1074 are taken as all or part of the output image.

此外,輸出圖像取得裝置1075亦可使用與1個或2個以上種類識別符相對應之1個或2個以上查找表所具有之對應資訊中與圖像解析部106所取得之1個以上特徵量相對應之1個以上對應資訊,來取得與圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像的全部或一部分相對應的1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分,當作輸出圖像之全部或一部分。此外,1個或2個以上的種類識別符係為種類識別符取得裝置1071所取得之種類識別符。 Further, the output image acquisition device 1075 may use one or more pieces of corresponding information included in one or two or more search tables corresponding to one or two or more types of identifiers and the image analysis unit 106. All or a part of one or more second images corresponding to all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit 104 is acquired as one or more pieces of corresponding information corresponding to the feature amount, and is used as an output map. Like all or part of it. Further, one or two or more types of identifiers are the type identifiers acquired by the type identifier acquiring means 1071.

此外,輸出圖像取得裝置1075係適於執行上述之修正處理。 Further, the output image obtaining means 1075 is adapted to perform the above-described correction processing.

輸出圖像取得裝置1075通常可由MPU或記憶體等來實現。合成部108之處理程序通常係用軟體來實現,該軟體係儲存於ROM等儲存媒體,但也可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The output image acquisition device 1075 can be generally implemented by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the synthesizing unit 108 is usually implemented by software, which is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM, but can also be implemented by a hardware (dedicated circuit).

合成部108係將映射部107所取得之2個以上各第二時空區塊配置在和2個以上各第二時空區塊相對應之第一時空區塊之時間性位置、或空間性位置、或空間性及時間性位置,並產生輸出圖像。 The synthesizing unit 108 arranges two or more second spatiotemporal blocks acquired by the mapping unit 107 in a temporal position or a spatial position of the first spatiotemporal block corresponding to the two or more second spatiotemporal blocks, Or spatial and temporal locations and produce an output image.

合成部108通常可由MPU或記憶體等來實現。合成部108之處理程序通常係用軟體來實現,該軟體則儲存於ROM等儲存媒體,但亦可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The synthesizing section 108 can be generally realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the synthesizing unit 108 is usually implemented by software, and the software is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM, but it can also be realized by a hardware (dedicated circuit).

圖像輸出部109係用於將輸出圖像輸出。圖像輸出部109亦可輸出合成部108所產生之輸出圖像。此處之所謂輸出通常係指使用顯示器的顯示、使用投影機的投影,但亦包含向外部裝置、或其他程式進行傳送的概念。 The image output unit 109 is for outputting an output image. The image output unit 109 can also output an output image generated by the synthesizing unit 108. The term "output" as used herein generally refers to the use of a display of a display and projection using a projector, but also includes the concept of transmitting to an external device or other program.

圖像輸出部109可想成包含例如顯示器或投影機等輸出裝置,亦可想成不包含例如顯示器或投影機等輸出裝置。圖像輸出部109可用例如輸出裝置之驅動軟體、或輸出裝置之驅動軟體及輸出裝置等來實現。 The image output unit 109 can be thought of as including an output device such as a display or a projector, and can be thought of as not including an output device such as a display or a projector. The image output unit 109 can be realized by, for example, a drive software of an output device, a drive software of an output device, an output device, or the like.

查找表更新部110係按照指示受理部103所受理之指示,將查找表所具有之2個以上對應資訊的任一個加以變更。查找表更新部110可將查找表具有之全部對應資訊進行更新,亦可將一部分對應資訊進行更新。對應資訊包含產生第二圖像之全部或一部分所需之演算式、或產生第二圖像之全部或一部分所需之參數群時,查找表更新部110會例如按照指示,將包含於演算式之參數群、或產生第二圖像之全部或一部分所需之參數群進行變更。例如,指示為包含圖像之立體感程度時,查找表更新部110使用以從使用者輸入之圖像立體感之程度,將對應資訊具有之參數群進行變更。此種情形之變更方法(變更所需之式子等)並非所問。例如,查找表更新部110係與圖像立體感之程度資訊對應地將參數群保存在未圖示之儲存媒體,並從未圖示之儲存媒體讀出和所指示之圖像立體感之程度資訊相對應之參數群。而且,例如,在查找表更新部110保存有產生以圖像立體感 之程度作為參數的參數群所需之演算式,將圖像立體感之程度代入此種演算式,進行演算,而取得參數群。 The lookup table update unit 110 changes any one of the two or more pieces of correspondence information included in the lookup table in accordance with an instruction received by the instruction accepting unit 103. The lookup table update unit 110 may update all the corresponding information of the lookup table, and may also update a part of the corresponding information. When the correspondence information includes a calculation formula required to generate all or a part of the second image or a parameter group required to generate all or a part of the second image, the lookup table update unit 110 will include the calculation formula, for example, according to the instruction. The parameter group or the parameter group required to generate all or part of the second image is changed. For example, when the instruction indicates that the degree of stereoscopic effect of the image is included, the lookup table update unit 110 changes the parameter group having the corresponding information by using the degree of stereoscopic feeling of the image input from the user. The method of changing such a situation (the formula required for the change, etc.) is not asked. For example, the lookup table update unit 110 stores the parameter group in a storage medium (not shown) corresponding to the degree of image stereoscopic feeling, and reads the degree of stereoscopic feeling of the image from the storage medium (not shown). The parameter group corresponding to the information. Moreover, for example, the lookup table update unit 110 stores the image stereoscopic effect. The degree of calculation is required for the parameter group of the parameter, and the degree of the stereoscopic effect of the image is substituted into the calculation formula, and the calculation is performed to obtain the parameter group.

再者,指示受理部103受理選擇1個以上第二圖像之候補的指示時,例如,查找表更新部110會從1個以上第二圖像的各候補取得1個以上特徵量,並取得該1個以上特徵量當作參數群。此外,指示受理部103受理選擇1個以上第二圖像之候補的指示時,例如,查找表更新部110會從1個以上第二圖像的各候補取得1個以上特徵量,並將該1個以上特徵量代入預先儲存之演算式進行演算,而取得參數群。 In addition, when the instruction accepting unit 103 receives an instruction to select one or more candidates for the second image, for example, the lookup table update unit 110 acquires one or more feature amounts from each of the one or more second images, and acquires The one or more feature quantities are taken as a parameter group. In addition, when the instruction accepting unit 103 receives an instruction to select one or more candidates for the second image, for example, the lookup table update unit 110 acquires one or more feature amounts from each of the one or more second images, and One or more feature quantities are substituted into a pre-stored calculation formula to perform calculation, and a parameter group is obtained.

查找表更新部110通常可由MPU或記憶體等來實現。合成部108之處理程序通常係用軟體來實現,該軟體則儲存於ROM等儲存媒體,但也可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The lookup table update unit 110 can be generally implemented by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the synthesizing unit 108 is usually implemented by software, and the software is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM, but it can also be implemented by a hardware (dedicated circuit).

接著,使用第2圖之流程圖來說明有關圖像處理裝置1的動作。 Next, the operation of the image processing apparatus 1 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

(步驟S201)圖像受理部104判斷是否已受理1個以上圖像。若已受理1個以上圖像,則進至步驟S202,若未受理1個以上圖像,則到步驟S210。此外,此處之圖像通常是由2個以上靜態畫所構成之影像。 (Step S201) The image accepting unit 104 determines whether one or more images have been accepted. If one or more images have been accepted, the process proceeds to step S202, and if one or more images are not accepted, the process proceeds to step S210. In addition, the image here is usually an image composed of two or more still pictures.

(步驟S202)分割部105將步驟S201所受理之圖像依空間性、或時間性、或空間性及時間性分割成2個以上,以取得2個以上第一時空區塊。 (Step S202) The dividing unit 105 divides the image accepted in step S201 into two or more spatially or temporally, or spatially and temporally, to obtain two or more first spatiotemporal blocks.

(步驟S203)圖像解析部106將1代入計數器i。 (Step S203) The image analysis unit 106 substitutes 1 for the counter i.

(步驟S204)圖像解析部106判斷步驟S202所取得之第一時空區塊中是否存在第i個區塊。若第i個區塊存在,則到步驟S205,若第i個區塊不存在,則到步驟S208。 (Step S204) The image analysis unit 106 determines whether or not the i-th block exists in the first spatiotemporal block acquired in step S202. If the i-th block exists, the process goes to step S205, and if the i-th block does not exist, the process goes to step S208.

(步驟S205)圖像解析部106對第i個第一時空區塊進行圖像解析處理。然後,圖像解析部106決定和第i個第一時空區塊相對應之第一圖像的全部或一部分。有關圖像解析處理,係使用第3圖之流程圖來說明。 (Step S205) The image analysis unit 106 performs image analysis processing on the i-th first space-time block. Then, the image analysis unit 106 determines all or a part of the first image corresponding to the i-th first space-time block. The image analysis processing will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

(步驟S206)映射部107使用與步驟S205所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊,來取得與步驟S205所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的第二圖像的全部或一部分,當作輸出圖像之全部或一 部分。此種處理稱為映射處理。有關映射處理,係使用第4圖的流程圖來說明。此外,本步驟所取得之輸出圖像之全部或一部分係為第二時空區塊。 (Step S206) The mapping unit 107 acquires the second map corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined in step S205, using the correspondence information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined in step S205. All or part of the image, as all or one of the output images section. This type of processing is called mapping processing. The mapping process is explained using the flowchart of FIG. In addition, all or part of the output image obtained in this step is a second space-time block.

(步驟S207)圖像解析部106將計數器i遞增1,並回到步驟S204。 (Step S207) The image analysis unit 106 increments the counter i by 1, and returns to step S204.

(步驟S208)合成部108將步驟S206所取得之2個以上第二時空區塊進行合成,並產生輸出圖像。更詳細而言,係將步驟S206所取得之2個以上各第二時空區塊配置在與2個以上各第二時空區塊相對應之第一時空區塊的時間性、或空間性、或空間性及時間性位置,並產生輸出圖像。 (Step S208) The synthesizing unit 108 synthesizes the two or more second spatiotemporal blocks acquired in step S206, and generates an output image. More specifically, the two or more second spatiotemporal blocks obtained in step S206 are arranged in time, or spatiality, or in the first spatiotemporal block corresponding to two or more second spatiotemporal blocks. Spatial and temporal position and produce an output image.

(步驟S209)圖像輸出部109將步驟S208所產生之輸出圖像予以輸出。 (Step S209) The image output unit 109 outputs the output image generated in step S208.

(步驟S210)指示受理部103判斷是否已受理使用者的指示。若有受理使用者的指示,則進到步驟S211,若未受理使用者的指示,則回到步驟S201。 (Step S210) The instruction accepting unit 103 determines whether or not the user's instruction has been accepted. If there is an instruction to accept the user, the process proceeds to step S211, and if the user's instruction is not received, the process returns to step S201.

(步驟S211)查找表更新部110按照步驟S210所受理之指示,將查找表進行更新。這種處理稱為查找表更新處理。有關查找表更新處理,係使用第6圖的流程圖來說明。 (Step S211) The lookup table update unit 110 updates the lookup table in accordance with the instruction accepted in step S210. This process is called lookup table update processing. The lookup table update process is described using the flowchart of FIG.

此外,第2圖之流程圖中,藉由電源之切斷或處理結束之中斷,處理即告結束。 Further, in the flowchart of Fig. 2, the processing is terminated by the interruption of the power supply or the interruption of the processing end.

再者,第2圖的流程圖中,也可在受理複數個圖像或圖像流(stream)中,受理步驟S210之指示,並更新查找表。 Furthermore, in the flowchart of FIG. 2, the instruction of step S210 may be accepted in a plurality of images or image streams, and the lookup table may be updated.

接著,有關步驟S205的圖像解析處理,係使用第3圖的流程圖來說明。 Next, the image analysis processing of step S205 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

(步驟S301)圖像解析部106係對上述第i個第一時空區塊進行圖像解析,並取得為1個以上特徵量的特徵量向量(稱為第一特徵量向量)。此外,1個以上特徵量係為例如上述近傍特徵量或/及整體特徵量中的1個以上特徵量。再者,例如1個以上特徵量係指例如複數個畫素最大值(MAX)及最小值(MIN)、動態範圍(DR=MAX-MIN)、亮度度數分布、時間方向之差分值等。而且,從圖像取得這種1個以上特徵量的技術係為習知技術,故其詳細說明省略。此外,特徵量並不限於上述的特徵量,應無庸贅言。 (Step S301) The image analysis unit 106 performs image analysis on the i-th first space-time block, and acquires a feature amount vector (referred to as a first feature amount vector) having one or more feature amounts. Further, one or more feature quantities are, for example, one or more feature amounts of the above-described near-minus feature amount and/or overall feature amount. Further, for example, one or more feature quantities mean, for example, a plurality of pixel maximum values (MAX) and minimum values (MIN), a dynamic range (DR=MAX-MIN), a luminance power number distribution, and a difference value in the time direction. Further, the technique for obtaining such one or more feature amounts from an image is a conventional technique, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the feature amount is not limited to the above-described feature amount, and it should be understood.

(步驟S302)圖像解析部106將1代入計數器i。 (Step S302) The image analysis unit 106 substitutes 1 for the counter i.

(步驟S303)圖像解析部106判斷在儲存部101之查找表中是否存在第i個對應資訊。若第i個對應資訊存在,則到步驟S304,若第i個對應資訊不存在,則到步驟S307。此外,儲存部101存在2個以上查找表時,則在本步驟中,可使用任一個查找表。此外,在進行後述之種類識別符取得處理後,可使用與該種類識別符取得處理所取得之種類識別符相對應的查找表。 (Step S303) The image analysis unit 106 determines whether or not the i-th correspondence information exists in the lookup table of the storage unit 101. If the i-th corresponding information exists, the process goes to step S304, and if the i-th corresponding information does not exist, the process goes to step S307. Further, when there are two or more lookup tables in the storage unit 101, any one of the lookup tables can be used in this step. Further, after performing the type identifier acquisition processing described later, a lookup table corresponding to the type identifier obtained by the type identifier acquisition processing can be used.

(步驟S304)圖像解析部106取得第i個對應資訊所具有之特徵量向量(稱為第二特徵量向量)。 (Step S304) The image analysis unit 106 acquires a feature amount vector (referred to as a second feature amount vector) included in the i-th correspondence information.

(步驟S305)圖像解析部106計算步驟S301所取得之第一特徵量向量和步驟S304所取得之第二特徵量向量的距離,將該距離與i(第i個對應資訊)相對應地暫時積存在緩衝器。 (Step S305) The image analysis unit 106 calculates the distance between the first feature amount vector obtained in step S301 and the second feature amount vector obtained in step S304, and temporarily compares the distance with i (i-th correspondence information). Accumulated in the buffer.

(步驟S306)圖像解析部106將計數器i遞增1,並回到步驟S303。 (Step S306) The image analysis unit 106 increments the counter i by 1, and returns to step S303.

(步驟S307)圖像解析部106將積存於緩衝器的距離為最小之對應資訊取得。返回上位處理。此外,取得對應資訊之處理即為決定第一圖像之全部或一部分的處理。 (Step S307) The image analysis unit 106 acquires the corresponding information in which the distance stored in the buffer is the smallest. Return to the upper processing. Further, the process of obtaining the corresponding information is a process of determining all or part of the first image.

此外,於第3圖的流程圖中,對應資訊係保存有ID(也可為位址),例如,也可代入預先儲存有1個以上特徵量之演算式中以取得ID(亦可為位址)。亦即,不問圖像解析處理之方法為何。 Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 3, the corresponding information system stores an ID (which may be an address). For example, it may be substituted into a calculation formula in which one or more feature amounts are stored in advance to obtain an ID (may also be a bit). site). That is, the method of image analysis processing is not asked.

其次,使用第4圖的流程圖來說明有關步驟S206的映射處理例。 Next, an example of mapping processing in step S206 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

(步驟S401)構成映射部107之種類識別符取得裝置1071取得用以識別所要利用之查找表種類的種類識別符。有關這種種類識別符取得處理的例子,係使用第5圖的流程圖來說明。 (Step S401) The type identifier acquiring means 1071 constituting the mapping unit 107 acquires the type identifier for identifying the type of the lookup table to be used. An example of such a type identifier acquisition process will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

(步驟S402)輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072取得與步驟S401所取得之種類識別符相對應之查找表中的對應資訊的參數群,而該對應資訊係為與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊。 (Step S402) The output image candidate obtaining means 1072 acquires the parameter group of the corresponding information in the lookup table corresponding to the type identifier acquired in step S401, and the corresponding information is determined by the image analyzing unit 106. Corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of an image.

(步驟S403)輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072使用步驟S402所取得之參數群,來產生與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相 對應的第二圖像之全部或一部分。更具體而言,例如,輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072係將步驟S402所取得之參數群代入預先儲存中之演算式,並執行演算式。接著,輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072取得第二圖像之全部或一部分。 (Step S403) The output image candidate obtaining means 1072 generates all or a part of the first image determined by the image analyzing unit 106, using the parameter group acquired in step S402. All or part of the corresponding second image. More specifically, for example, the output image candidate acquisition means 1072 substitutes the parameter group acquired in step S402 into the calculation formula stored in advance, and executes the calculation formula. Next, the output image candidate acquisition means 1072 acquires all or part of the second image.

(步驟S404)判斷裝置1073從限制條件儲存部102讀取限制條件。 (Step S404) The determination means 1073 reads the restriction condition from the restriction condition storage unit 102.

(步驟S405)判斷裝置1073判斷步驟S402所取得之第二圖像的全部或一部分是否滿足步驟S403所讀取的限制條件,並將判斷結果代入緩衝器。 (Step S405) The judging means 1073 judges whether all or a part of the second image acquired in step S402 satisfies the restriction condition read in step S403, and substitutes the judgment result in the buffer.

(步驟S406)步驟S404之判斷結果為「滿足(符合)限制條件」時,進至步驟S407,「不滿足(不符)限制條件」時,進到步驟S408。 (Step S406) If the result of the determination in step S404 is "satisfaction (conformity) restriction condition", the process proceeds to step S407, and if the "not satisfied (disagreement) restriction condition" is reached, the process proceeds to step S408.

(步驟S407)輸出圖像取得裝置1075獲得步驟S402所取得之第二圖像的全部或一部分,當作為輸出圖像的全部或一部分。返回到上位處理。 (Step S407) The output image obtaining means 1075 obtains all or part of the second image acquired in step S402 as all or part of the output image. Return to the upper processing.

(步驟S408)變更裝置1074將步驟S402所取得之第二圖像之全部或一部分以滿足限制條件的方式進行變更,並取得變更圖像。 (Step S408) The changing means 1074 changes all or part of the second image acquired in step S402 so as to satisfy the restriction condition, and acquires the changed image.

(步驟S409)輸出圖像取得裝置1075獲得步驟S408所取得之變更圖像,當作輸出圖像之全部或一部分,並返回到上位處理。 (Step S409) The output image obtaining means 1075 obtains the changed image obtained in step S408 as all or part of the output image, and returns to the upper processing.

此外,第4圖的流程圖中,產生第二圖像之全部或一部分的方法、或取得第二圖像之全部或一部分的方法,也可用其他方法。 Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 4, a method of generating all or a part of the second image or a method of acquiring all or a part of the second image may be performed by other methods.

而且,第4圖之流程圖中,儲存部101之查找表為一個時,步驟S401的處理就不需要,應無庸贅言。 Further, in the flowchart of Fig. 4, when the lookup table of the storage unit 101 is one, the processing of step S401 is unnecessary, and it goes without saying.

其次,使用第5圖的流程圖來說明有關步驟S S401的種類識別符取得處理例。 Next, an example of the type identifier acquisition processing in step S S401 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

(步驟S501)種類識別符取得裝置1071取得上述第i個區塊(第一圖像)的特徵量向量。 (Step S501) The type identifier acquiring means 1071 acquires the feature amount vector of the i-th block (first image).

(步驟S502)種類識別符取得裝置1071將1代入計數器i。 (Step S502) The type identifier acquiring means 1071 substitutes 1 for the counter i.

(步驟S503)種類識別符取得裝置1071判斷儲存部101中是否存在第i個種類識別符。若存在第i個種類識別符,則進到步驟S504,第i個種類識別符若不存在,則到步驟S507。 (Step S503) The type identifier acquiring means 1071 determines whether or not the i-th type identifier is present in the storage unit 101. If the i-th type identifier is present, the process proceeds to step S504, and if the i-th type identifier does not exist, the process goes to step S507.

(步驟S504)種類識別符取得裝置1071取得與第i個種類識別符相對應的特徵量向量。 (Step S504) The type identifier acquiring means 1071 acquires the feature amount vector corresponding to the i-th type identifier.

(步驟S505)種類識別符取得裝置1071計算步驟S501所取得的特徵量向量與步驟S504所取得的特徵量向量的距離,將其與第i個種類識別符對應而暫時積存於緩衝器中。 (Step S505) The type identifier acquiring means 1071 calculates the distance between the feature amount vector acquired in step S501 and the feature amount vector acquired in step S504, and temporarily stores it in the buffer in association with the i-th type identifier.

(步驟S506)種類識別符取得裝置1071將計數器i遞增1,並回到步驟S503。 (Step S506) The type identifier acquiring means 1071 increments the counter i by 1, and returns to step S503.

(步驟S S507)種類識別符取得裝置1071取得與步驟S505所計算之最小距離相對應的種類識別符。返回到上位處理。 (Step S S507) The type identifier acquiring means 1071 acquires the type identifier corresponding to the minimum distance calculated in step S505. Return to the upper processing.

此外,第5在圖之流程圖中,種類識別符取得處理也可用如上述的其他方法。亦即,第5圖之流程圖中,雖使用區塊之特徵量向量(1個以上近傍特徵量)來決定種類識別符。但如上所述,亦可使用整體特徵量或近傍特徵量來決定種類識別符,亦可用電子節目表之資訊等來決定種類識別符,也可依來自使用者之指示來決定種類識別符。 Further, in the fifth flowchart of the figure, the type identifier acquisition processing may be performed by other methods as described above. That is, in the flowchart of Fig. 5, the type identifier is determined using the feature quantity vector (one or more near feature quantities) of the block. However, as described above, the type identifier may be determined using the overall feature amount or the near feature quantity, the type identifier may be determined using information of the electronic program guide, or the like, or the type identifier may be determined according to an instruction from the user.

接著,使用第6圖的流程圖來說明有關步驟S211的查找表更新處理。 Next, the lookup table update processing related to step S211 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

(步驟S601)查找表更新部110取得指示受理部103所受理的指示。 (Step S601) The lookup table update unit 110 acquires an instruction accepted by the instruction accepting unit 103.

(步驟S602)查找表更新部110取得包含於步驟S601所取得之指示的1個以上參數。 (Step S602) The lookup table update unit 110 acquires one or more parameters included in the instruction acquired in step S601.

(步驟S603)查找表更新部110將1代入計數器i。 (Step S603) The lookup table update unit 110 substitutes 1 for the counter i.

(步驟S604)查找表更新部110判斷儲存部101的查找表中是否存在第i個對應資訊。若第i個對應資訊存在,則進到步驟S605,若第i個對應資訊不存在,則返回到上位處理。 (Step S604) The lookup table update unit 110 determines whether or not the i-th correspondence information exists in the lookup table of the storage unit 101. If the i-th corresponding information exists, the process proceeds to step S605, and if the i-th corresponding information does not exist, the process returns to the upper process.

(步驟S605)查找表更新部110使用步驟S602所取得的1個以上參數,來變更第i個對應資訊所具有的參數群、或第i個對應資訊所具有的演算式。 (Step S605) The lookup table update unit 110 changes the parameter group of the i-th correspondence information or the calculation formula of the i-th correspondence information using one or more parameters acquired in step S602.

(步驟S606)查找表更新部110將計數器i遞增1,並回到步驟S604。 (Step S606) The lookup table update unit 110 increments the counter i by 1, and returns to step S604.

此外,第6圖之流程圖中,存在有複數個查找表時,也可將全部的查找表進行更新。 Further, in the flowchart of Fig. 6, when there are a plurality of lookup tables, all the lookup tables may be updated.

其次,針對使用限制條件將圖像等進行動態變更處理的具體例加以說明。藉由圖像處理裝置1之限制條件儲存部102、映射部107的判斷裝置1073及變更裝置1074,以滿足限制條件的方式進行處理,即可輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷的圖像。 Next, a specific example of performing dynamic change processing of an image or the like using a restriction condition will be described. By the restriction condition storage unit 102 of the image processing apparatus 1 and the determination means 1073 and the change means 1074 of the mapping unit 107, the image is adjusted so as to satisfy the restriction condition, and the image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose can be output.

第一具體例為輸出圖像之畫素值超過某一值時即進行修正,使之收斂到該值的處理。這種情形中,限制條件為「輸出圖像之1個以上畫素值不超過臨限值」。而對於經判斷裝置1073判斷為不符合這種限制條件的1個以上畫素,變更裝置1074就會進行修正,使之不超過臨限值。然後,輸出圖像取得裝置1075會使用經判斷裝置1073判斷為滿足限制條件之第二圖像的全部或一部分、或變更裝置1074所取得之變更圖像、或經判斷裝置1073判斷為滿足限制條件之第二圖像的全部或一部分及變更裝置1074所取得之變更圖像,來取得輸出圖像。 The first specific example is a process of correcting the pixel value of the output image when it exceeds a certain value, and converging it to the value. In this case, the restriction condition is "the one or more pixel values of the output image do not exceed the threshold". On the other hand, the changing means 1074 corrects one or more pixels that have been judged by the determining means 1073 to be inconsistent with such a restriction condition so as not to exceed the threshold. Then, the output image acquisition device 1075 uses all or part of the second image determined by the determination device 1073 to satisfy the restriction condition, or the changed image acquired by the changing device 1074, or the determination device 1073 determines that the restriction condition is satisfied. All or part of the second image and the changed image obtained by the changing device 1074 are used to obtain an output image.

第二具體例為在輸入圖像之畫素值已逸離正常範圍時,利用周邊畫素將輸入圖像之該畫素進行填孔修正的處理。在此種情況中,限制條件係指「輸入圖像之畫素值不逸離正常範圍」的情形。而對於經判斷裝置1073判斷為不符合這種限制條件的1個以上畫素,變更裝置1074會取得該畫素之預先決定範圍之周邊畫素的1個以上畫素值,並使用該1個以上畫素值,來決定異常畫素的畫素值。其次,輸出圖像取得裝置1075會使用變更裝置1074所取得之1個以上特徵量、或圖像受理部104所受理之圖像的一部分1個以上特徵量,來取得1個以上第二圖像的一部分。 The second specific example is a process of performing hole filling correction on the pixel of the input image by using a peripheral pixel when the pixel value of the input image has escaped from the normal range. In this case, the restriction condition refers to the case where the pixel value of the input image does not escape from the normal range. On the other hand, the change device 1074 acquires one or more pixel values of the peripheral pixels of the predetermined range of the pixel, and uses the one or more pixels that have been determined by the determination device 1073 to be inconsistent with such a restriction condition. The above pixel values are used to determine the pixel values of the anomalous pixels. Next, the output image acquisition device 1075 acquires one or more second images by using one or more feature amounts acquired by the changing device 1074 or one or more feature amounts of the image accepted by the image receiving unit 104. a part of.

第三具體例為在使用對應資訊取得輸出圖像時,若剛剛使用了查找表之一個對應資訊,則接著進行使用其他對應資訊的處理。這種情況 下,限制條件為「不連續使用相同的對應資訊」的情形。而判斷裝置1073會判斷與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊是否剛剛被使用過。此外,此種情形中,用以確定剛剛利用之對應資訊的資訊係至少暫時予以積存。其次,若判斷裝置1073判斷為與圖像解析部106所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應之對應資訊係與剛剛使用之對應資訊相同時,變更裝置1074即取得第二接近的對應資訊。亦即,變更裝置1074會對圖像解析部106將該已決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分去除,再度將用以決定第一圖像之全部或一部分的指示傳到圖像解析部106,由圖像解析部106再度決定第一圖像之全部或一部分。這種與第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應之對應資訊,對於處理對象之輸入圖像或時空區塊等,係為與第二接近之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊。然後,輸出圖像取得裝置1075會使用變更裝置1074所取得之對應資訊來取得1個以上第二圖像的一部分。 In the third specific example, when the output image is obtained using the corresponding information, if one of the correspondence information of the lookup table is just used, the processing using the other corresponding information is performed. This situation Next, the restriction condition is "the same correspondence information is not continuously used". The judging means 1073 judges whether or not the corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analyzing unit 106 has just been used. In addition, in such a case, the information used to determine the corresponding information just used is at least temporarily accumulated. Next, when the judging means 1073 determines that the corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analyzing unit 106 is the same as the corresponding information just used, the changing means 1074 obtains the second close correspondence. News. In other words, the changing means 1074 removes all or a part of the determined first image from the image analyzing unit 106, and transmits an instruction for determining all or part of the first image to the image analyzing unit 106 again. The image analysis unit 106 determines all or part of the first image again. The corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image is corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image that is close to the second for the input image or the spatiotemporal block of the processing object. . Then, the output image acquisition device 1075 acquires a part of one or more second images using the correspondence information acquired by the changing device 1074.

第四具體例係包含於限制條件之參數與變更對象並不相同的例子。第四具體例為例如輸出圖像之畫素值超過臨限值時,就使用特定的對應資訊重新處理的情形。亦即,限制條件為「輸出圖像之1個以上畫素值不超過臨限值」的情形。然後,對於經判斷裝置1073判斷為不符合這種限制條件的1個以上畫素,變更裝置1074會讀出預先決定的對應資訊。使用對應資訊,該輸出圖像取得裝置1075將再度構成輸出圖像。 The fourth specific example is an example in which the parameters included in the restriction condition are not the same as the object to be changed. The fourth specific example is a case where, for example, when the pixel value of the output image exceeds the threshold value, the specific corresponding information is used for reprocessing. That is, the restriction condition is "the case where one or more pixel values of the output image do not exceed the threshold". Then, the change device 1074 reads the predetermined correspondence information for one or more pixels that have been determined by the determination device 1073 to be inconsistent with such a restriction condition. Using the corresponding information, the output image acquisition means 1075 will again constitute an output image.

第五具體例係使用於判定複數個部位之參數的例子。第五具體例係例如限制條件為「輸入圖像之畫素值和輸出圖像之畫素值的差應在臨限值以內」的情形。對於經判斷裝置1073判斷為不符合這種限制條件的1個以上畫素,變更裝置1074會修正輸出圖像之該畫素的畫素值,將與輸入圖像之畫素的畫素值差設在臨限值以內。至於輸出圖像取得裝置1075則取得具有此種畫素值之畫素的輸出圖像。 The fifth specific example is an example used to determine parameters of a plurality of parts. The fifth specific example is, for example, a case where the difference between the pixel value of the input image and the pixel value of the output image should be within the threshold. The change means 1074 corrects the pixel value of the pixel of the output image, and the pixel value of the pixel of the input image is different from the one or more pixels determined by the determination means 1073 to be inconsistent with the restriction condition. Set within the threshold. The output image obtaining means 1075 obtains an output image of a pixel having such a pixel value.

如以上所述,若依本實施形態,可以提供用以輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷之圖像的圖像處理裝置。例如,若依本實施形態,可以提供用以輸出相較於輸入圖像,腦負荷得更為減低之圖像的圖像處理裝置、或輸出更能給予腦部刺激而増加娛樂性之圖像的圖像處理裝置等。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide an image processing apparatus for outputting an image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose. For example, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide an image processing apparatus for outputting an image whose brain load is more reduced than an input image, or to output an image which is more capable of giving brain stimulation and entertainment. Image processing device, etc.

再者,本實施形態之圖像處理裝置輸出腦負荷更為減低的圖像時,該圖像處理裝置可以輸出對於人類腦部可認知為合適圖像的圖像。 Further, when the image processing apparatus according to the present embodiment outputs an image in which the brain load is further reduced, the image processing apparatus can output an image that can be recognized as an appropriate image for the human brain.

更具體而言,若依本實施形態,藉由可輸出在光量、光源位置、光源顏色、攝影機位置等不同環境拍攝的圖像,可以輸出對於人類腦部可認知為合適圖像的圖像。更具體而言,若依本實施形態,可以輸出腦部更能感受到質感、遠近感、存在感、臨場感、重量感、温熱感、涼爽感、速度感、躍動感、動作流暢感、新鮮感、高級感等的圖像。 More specifically, according to the present embodiment, an image that can be recognized as a suitable image for the human brain can be output by outputting an image captured in a different environment such as the amount of light, the position of the light source, the color of the light source, or the position of the camera. More specifically, according to the present embodiment, the brain can be more sensed in texture, proximity, presence, presence, weight, warmth, coolness, speed, sensation, fluency, and freshness. Image of feeling, high sense, etc.

再者,若依本實施形態,藉由使用複數個查找表中的適當查找表,可以輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷的圖像。 Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, an image whose brain load is adjusted according to the purpose can be output by using an appropriate lookup table in a plurality of lookup tables.

而且,若依本實施形態,透過以滿足限制條件之方式變更輸出圖像,可以輸出依目的更合適地調整腦負荷的圖像。 Further, according to the present embodiment, by changing the output image so as to satisfy the restriction condition, it is possible to output an image in which the brain load is more appropriately adjusted according to the purpose.

同時,若依本實施形態,透過能將查找表客製化,可以輸出經按照使用者之喜好等來更適當地調整腦負荷的圖像。 Meanwhile, according to the present embodiment, by allowing the lookup table to be customized, it is possible to output an image in which the brain load is more appropriately adjusted in accordance with the user's preference or the like.

此外,本實施形態之圖像處理裝置1亦可為電視接收機。此種情況中,圖像受理部104受理之圖像為構成電視影像之圖像。 Further, the image processing device 1 of the present embodiment may be a television receiver. In this case, the image accepted by the image receiving unit 104 is an image constituting a television image.

而且,若使用本實施形態之圖像處理裝置1,可以實現使用所受理的動畫來產生並輸出依目的即時調整腦負荷之動畫的裝置。 Further, according to the image processing apparatus 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to realize an apparatus for generating and outputting an animation for instantly adjusting the brain load according to the purpose of the received animation.

再者,本實施形態中,查找表僅具有一個對應資訊時,圖像處理裝置1也可不具備圖像解析部106。此種情形下,圖像處理裝置1會呈如第7圖所示之結構。而且,此種情形下,映射部107係使用儲存部101之一對應資訊,來取得與圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應的1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分。此外,這種情況下,圖像解析部106也會存在,並且圖像解析部106亦可從所受理之1個以上圖像的全部或一部分取得1個以上特徵量,並由映射部107使用該特徵量進行上述之修正處理。 Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the lookup table has only one correspondence information, the image processing apparatus 1 does not need to include the image analysis unit 106. In this case, the image processing apparatus 1 has a structure as shown in Fig. 7. Further, in this case, the mapping unit 107 acquires one or more second images corresponding to all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image accepting unit 104, using one of the storage unit 101 correspondence information. All or part of it. Further, in this case, the image analysis unit 106 may exist, and the image analysis unit 106 may acquire one or more feature amounts from all or part of the accepted one or more images, and may be used by the mapping unit 107. This feature amount performs the above-described correction processing.

此外,本實施形態之圖像處理裝置1中,亦可不具備指示受理部103或查找表更新部110等一部份構成元件,應無庸贅言。 Further, the image processing device 1 of the present embodiment does not need to include a part of constituent elements such as the instruction accepting unit 103 or the lookup table updating unit 110, and it is needless to say.

而且,本實施形態之處理亦可用軟體來實現。又,可透過軟體下載等來分布配置該軟體。此外,也可將該軟體儲存於CD-ROM等儲存媒體來流通。又,本說明書中之其他實施形態亦相當於這些作法。此外,實現本實施形態之圖像處理裝置的軟體係類如以下的程式。亦即,該程式係在儲存媒體中儲存有查找表,該查找表具有1個或2個以上的對應資訊,而該對應資訊係為1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分與第二圖像的全部或一部分取得對應所需的資訊,該第二圖像相較於前述第一圖像,係為經調整腦負荷且與前述第一圖像相同對象有關之圖像,藉以使電腦作為:圖像受理部,用以受理1個以上圖像;映射部,使用前述1個或2個以上對應資訊中之任一對應資訊,來取得與前述圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像的全部或一部分相對應之1個以上第二圖像的全部或一部分;及圖像輸出部,輸出前述映射部所取得之1個以上第二圖像的全部、或者為前述映射部所取得之1個以上第二圖像之一部分之集合的1個以上輸出圖像,而發揮功能之程式。 Further, the processing of this embodiment can also be realized by software. Moreover, the software can be distributed and distributed through software downloading or the like. Alternatively, the software may be stored in a storage medium such as a CD-ROM and distributed. Further, other embodiments in the present specification also correspond to these practices. Further, the software system of the image processing apparatus according to the present embodiment is realized as follows. That is, the program stores a lookup table in the storage medium, the lookup table has one or more corresponding information, and the corresponding information is all or a part of the first image and the second image. Corresponding information is obtained in all or part of the image, and the second image is an image related to the same object as the first image after adjusting the brain load compared to the first image, thereby The image receiving unit receives one or more images, and the mapping unit acquires one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit using any one of the one or two pieces of corresponding information. All or part of one or more second images corresponding to all or part of the image; and the image output unit outputs all of the one or more second images acquired by the mapping unit or obtained by the mapping unit A program that functions as one or more output images of a set of one or more second images.

再者,上述程式中,前述查找表較佳為具有2個以上對應資訊,以使電腦發揮下述功能的程式,亦即,使電腦作為用以決定與前述圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像的全部或一部分相對應之第一圖像的全部或一部分的圖像解析部而發揮功能;且使電腦作為使用與前述圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應之對應資訊,來取得與前述圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應之第二圖像的前述映射部而發揮功能。 Further, in the above program, the lookup table preferably has two or more pieces of corresponding information, so that the computer functions as a program for determining the one accepted by the image receiving unit. All or a part of the image corresponds to all or part of the image analysis unit of the first image; and the computer is used as a whole or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit. Corresponding to the corresponding information, the map unit that obtains the second image corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit functions.

而且,上述程式中,前述第一圖像之全部或一部分係為要輸入之影像中的一部分的第一時空區塊,前述第二圖像之全部或一部分係為要輸出至畫面之影像中的一部份的第二時空區塊,而前述圖像受理部受理為1個以上圖像之集合的影像,使電腦作為將前述圖像受理部所受理之影像依空間性、或時間性、或空間性及時間性分割為2個以上,以取得2個以上第一時空區塊的分割部而進一步發揮功能;而前述圖像解析部按前述分割部所取得之2個以上各第一時空區塊的每個,來決定和該各第一時空區塊對應之第一圖像的全部或一部分,前述映射部按前述2個以上各第一時空區塊的每個,使用與前述圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相 對應之對應資訊,來取得與前述圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的第二時空區塊,將前述映射部所取得之2個以上各第二時空區塊配置在與該2個以上之各第二時空區塊相對應之第一時空區塊的時間性、或空間性、或空間性及時間性位置,以產生輸出圖像的合成部,使電腦進一步發揮功能。 Moreover, in the above program, all or part of the first image is a first space-time block of a part of the image to be input, and all or part of the second image is to be outputted to the image of the screen. a part of the second space-time block, wherein the image receiving unit receives an image of a set of one or more images, and causes the computer to use the image accepted by the image receiving unit in a spatial or temporal manner, or The spatial and temporal division is divided into two or more, and the division unit of the two or more first space-time blocks is further used to function, and the image analysis unit performs two or more first time and space regions obtained by the division unit. Each of the blocks determines all or a part of the first image corresponding to each of the first space-time blocks, and the mapping unit uses the image analysis for each of the two or more first space-time blocks All or part of the first image determined by the Ministry Corresponding to the corresponding information, the second spatiotemporal block corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analyzing unit is obtained, and two or more second spatiotemporal blocks obtained by the mapping unit are arranged. In the temporal, spatial, or spatial and temporal position of the first spatiotemporal block corresponding to the two or more second spatiotemporal blocks, a synthesis unit that outputs an image is generated to further develop the computer Features.

此外,上述程式中,前述圖像解析部較佳為對前述圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像、或前述分割部所取得之2個以上各第一時空區塊進行解析,並取得1個以上特徵量,以決定與該1個以上特徵量相對應之第一圖像的全部或一部分,而使電腦發揮功能的程式。 Further, in the above-described program, the image analyzing unit preferably analyzes one or more images received by the image receiving unit or two or more first time and space blocks acquired by the dividing unit, and obtains A program for causing a computer to function by determining one or more feature amounts to determine all or part of the first image corresponding to the one or more feature amounts.

再者,上述程式中,前述儲存媒體中儲存有2組對以上由用以識別查找表種類之種類識別符和對應該種類識別符之查找表所構成的組對,前述映射部係設成具備有種類識別符取得裝置、與輸出圖像取得裝置,而適於使電腦發揮功能;前述種類識別符取得裝置係取得用於識別要利用之查找表種類的1個以上種類識別符;而輸出圖像取得裝置則從對應於前述1個以上種類識別符之1個以上查找表所具有的對應資訊中,使用和前述圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊,取得和前述圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像的全部或一部分相對應的第二圖像全部或一部分,當作輸出圖像之全部或一部分。 Further, in the above program, the storage medium stores two sets of pairs of pairs of the lookup table for identifying the type identifier of the lookup table type and the corresponding type identifier, and the mapping unit is provided with The type identifier acquiring means and the output image obtaining means are adapted to cause the computer to function; and the type identifier acquiring means acquires one or more types of identifiers for identifying the type of the lookup table to be used; The image acquisition device uses corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit from the correspondence information included in one or more lookup tables corresponding to the one or more types of identifiers. All or part of the second image corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit is obtained as all or part of the output image.

而且,上述程式中,係適於使電腦作為用以受理使用者之指示的指示受理部、及按照前述指示變更前述查找表所具有之2個以上對應資訊中的任一個之查找表更新部,而發揮功能。 Further, the program is adapted to cause the computer to be an instruction receiving unit for accepting an instruction from the user, and a lookup table updating unit for changing one of the two or more pieces of corresponding information included in the lookup table in accordance with the instruction. And play the function.

此外,用以實現本實施形態中之圖像處理裝置的軟體,係在儲存媒體中儲存有:查找表,具有1個或2個以上對應資訊,而該對應資訊係為用以取得使1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分、和與該第一圖像不同之第二圖像之全部或一部分的對應所需之資訊;及限制條件,為輸入圖像、對應資訊、或輸出圖像中之1種類以上資訊應滿足之條件,而使電腦作為:圖像受理部,用以受理1個以上圖像;映射部,使用1個或2個以上對應資訊中之任一對應資訊,以符合前述限制條件之方式取得與圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像的全部或一部分相對應之1個以上第二圖像的全部或 一部分;及圖像輸出部,輸出由前述映射部所取得之1個以上第二圖像的全部或一部分所構成之輸出圖像,而發揮功能的程式。 Further, in the software for realizing the image processing apparatus according to the present embodiment, the storage medium stores a lookup table having one or two or more pieces of corresponding information, and the corresponding information is used to acquire one. The information required for the correspondence of all or a part of the first image and all or a part of the second image different from the first image; and the restriction condition is an input image, a corresponding information, or an output image One of the above types of information should satisfy the conditions, and the computer is used as an image receiving unit for accepting one or more images; and the mapping unit uses one or two or more corresponding information to Acquiring all or one or more of the second images corresponding to all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit in accordance with the above-described restrictions And a part of the image output unit that outputs an output image composed of all or a part of one or more second images acquired by the mapping unit.

(實施形態2) (Embodiment 2)

本實施形態中,與實施形態1相較,圖像處理裝置2不具備分割部105及合成部108。 In the present embodiment, the image processing device 2 does not include the dividing unit 105 and the combining unit 108 as compared with the first embodiment.

第8圖為本實施形態之圖像處理裝置2的方塊圖。 Fig. 8 is a block diagram of the image processing device 2 of the embodiment.

圖像處理裝置2具備:儲存部101、限制條件儲存部102、指示受理部103、圖像受理部104、圖像解析部106、映射部107、圖像輸出部109、以及查找表更新部110。 The image processing device 2 includes a storage unit 101, a restriction condition storage unit 102, an instruction reception unit 103, an image reception unit 104, an image analysis unit 106, a mapping unit 107, an image output unit 109, and a lookup table update unit 110. .

其次,使用第9圖的之流程圖來說明有關圖像處理裝置2之動作。第9圖的流程圖係為第2圖之流程圖的一部分。但,步驟S205的圖像解析處理係針對步驟S201所受理的圖像整體來進行。此外,步驟S206的映射處理也是針對步驟S201所受理的圖像整體來進行。 Next, the operation of the image processing apparatus 2 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. The flowchart of Fig. 9 is a part of the flowchart of Fig. 2. However, the image analysis processing in step S205 is performed on the entire image accepted in step S201. Further, the mapping process of step S206 is also performed for the entire image accepted in step S201.

再者,於第9圖的流程圖中,透過電源之切斷或處理之中斷,處理即告結束。 Furthermore, in the flowchart of Fig. 9, the processing is terminated by the interruption of the power supply or the interruption of the processing.

而且,於第9圖的流程圖中,受理複數個圖像或圖像流的期間,亦可受理步驟S210的指示、或更新查找表。 Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 9, while receiving a plurality of images or image streams, the instruction of step S210 or the update of the lookup table may be accepted.

如以上所述,若依本實施形態,可以提供用以輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷之圖像的圖像處理裝置。例如,若依本實施形態,可以提供輸出相較於輸入圖像可更減低腦負荷之圖像的圖像處理裝置、或用以輸出更能給予腦部刺激而増加娛樂性之圖像的圖像處理裝置等。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide an image processing apparatus for outputting an image in which the brain load is adjusted according to the purpose. For example, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to provide an image processing apparatus that outputs an image that can reduce the brain load compared to the input image, or a map for outputting an image that is more entertaining to the brain. Like a processing device.

再者,本實施形態之圖像處理裝置輸出能夠更減低腦負荷之圖像時,該圖像處理裝置可以提供用以將對於人類腦部能夠認知為合適圖像之圖像予以輸出的圖像處理裝置。 Further, when the image processing apparatus according to the present embodiment outputs an image capable of reducing the brain load, the image processing apparatus can provide an image for outputting an image that can be recognized as a suitable image for the human brain. Processing device.

更具體而言,若依本實施形態,透過可以輸出經改良光量、光源位置、光源顏色、攝影機位置等圖像取得環境之圖像,能夠輸出人類腦部得以認知為合適之圖像。更具體而言,若依本實施形態,可以輸出腦部 更能感受到質感、遠近感、存在感、臨場感、重量感、温熱感、涼爽感、速度感、躍動感、動作流暢感、新鮮感、高級感等的圖像。 More specifically, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to output an image in which the image is acquired by an image such as an improved light amount, a light source position, a light source color, and a camera position, and it is possible to output an image that the human brain recognizes as appropriate. More specifically, according to this embodiment, the brain can be output I can feel images of texture, distance, presence, sense of presence, weight, warmth, coolness, speed, sensation, smoothness, freshness, and sense of high quality.

此外,亦可構成組裝有本實施形態之圖像處理裝置2的電視接收機。在此情況中,圖像受理部104所受理之圖像為構成電視影像之圖像。 Further, a television receiver in which the image processing device 2 of the present embodiment is incorporated may be constructed. In this case, the image accepted by the image receiving unit 104 is an image constituting a television image.

再者,本實施形態中,查找表僅有一個對應資訊時,圖像處理裝置2亦可不具備圖像解析部106。此種情況中,圖像處理裝置1成為第10圖所示之結構。此時,映射部107使用儲存部101之一個對應資訊,來取得與圖像受理部104所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應之1個以上第二圖像的全部或一部分。而且,此時,存有圖像解析部106,並從圖像解析部106所受理之1個以上圖像的全部或一部分取得1個以上特徵量,映射部107亦可使用該特徵量,以進行上述之修正處理。 Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when there is only one correspondence information in the lookup table, the image processing device 2 may not include the image analysis unit 106. In this case, the image processing apparatus 1 has the configuration shown in FIG. At this time, the mapping unit 107 acquires all or a part of one or more second images corresponding to all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image accepting unit 104, using one piece of correspondence information of the storage unit 101. In addition, at this time, the image analysis unit 106 stores one or more feature amounts from all or part of one or more images received by the image analysis unit 106, and the map unit 107 can use the feature amount to Perform the above correction process.

此外,本實施形態之圖像處理裝置2中,也可不具備指示受理部103或查找表更新部110等局部構成元件,應無庸贅言。 Further, the image processing device 2 of the present embodiment does not need to include a partial component such as the instruction accepting unit 103 or the lookup table updating unit 110, and it is needless to say.

再者,實現本實施形態之圖像處理裝置的軟體係為類如以下所述的程式。亦即,該程式係在儲存媒體中儲存有查找表,該查找表具有1個或2個以上對應資訊,而該對應資訊係為使1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分和第二圖像之全部或一部分取得對應所需之資訊,該第二圖像則為相較於前述第一圖像為已調整腦負荷,且為有關與前述第一圖像相同對象的圖像,藉以使電腦作為:圖像受理部,用以受理1個以上圖像;映射部,使用前述1個或2個以上對應資訊中之任一對應資訊,取得與前述圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應的1個以上第二圖像的全部或一部分;及圖像輸出部,用以輸出前述映射部所取得之1個以上第二圖像的全部、或前述映射部所取得之1個以上第二圖像之一部分之集合的1個以上輸出圖像,而發揮功能的程式。 Furthermore, the soft system for realizing the image processing apparatus of the present embodiment is a program similar to the one described below. That is, the program stores a lookup table in the storage medium, the lookup table has one or more corresponding information, and the corresponding information is to make all or part of the first image and the second image. Corresponding to all or part of the information required, the second image is an adjusted brain load compared to the first image, and is an image related to the same object as the first image, thereby The computer is an image receiving unit that accepts one or more images, and the mapping unit acquires one or more accepted by the image receiving unit using one of the one or two or more pieces of corresponding information. All or a part of one or more second images corresponding to all or a part of the image; and an image output unit for outputting all of the one or more second images obtained by the mapping unit or the mapping unit A program that functions as one or more output images of a set of one or more second images.

(實施形態3) (Embodiment 3)

本實施形態中,係就產生查找表之查找表取得裝置3加以說明。查找表取得裝置3係為將本說明書所稱之第一圖像的全部或一部分轉換為第二圖像之全部或一部分之查找表所用的學習裝置。 In the present embodiment, a lookup table acquisition device 3 for generating a lookup table will be described. The lookup table acquisition device 3 is a learning device used to convert all or a part of the first image referred to in the present specification into a lookup table of all or a part of the second image.

第11圖為本實施形態之查找表取得裝置3的方塊圖。 Fig. 11 is a block diagram of the lookup table acquisition device 3 of the present embodiment.

查找表取得裝置3具備:儲存部101、第一圖像儲存部31、第二圖像儲存部32、第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33、指示受理部103、候補輸出部34、第二圖像積存部35、第一圖像相關資訊取得部36、第二圖像相關資訊取得部37、查找表構成部38、以及查找表積存部39。 The lookup table acquisition device 3 includes a storage unit 101, a first image storage unit 31, a second image storage unit 32, a second image information candidate set storage unit 33, an instruction accepting unit 103, a candidate output unit 34, and a second The image storage unit 35, the first image related information acquisition unit 36, the second image related information acquisition unit 37, the lookup table configuration unit 38, and the lookup table storage unit 39.

指示受理部103係受理使用者的指示。此處之指示係為:將儲存於第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33的第二圖像資訊候補集合予以輸出之指示、選擇1個以上第二圖像資訊之候補的指示等。此處,所謂使用者,可為提供查找表取得裝置3之企業承辦人、亦可為上述圖像處理裝置或電視接收機之使用者(視聽者)等。此外,有關第二圖像資訊候補集合及第二圖像資訊,容後陳述。 The instruction accepting unit 103 accepts an instruction from the user. The indication here is an instruction to output a second image information candidate set stored in the second image information candidate set storage unit 33, an instruction to select one or more second image information candidates, and the like. Here, the user may be a business sponsor who provides the lookup table acquisition device 3, or may be a user (viewer) of the image processing device or the television receiver. In addition, the second image information candidate set and the second image information are described later.

第一圖像儲存部31得儲存1個以上第一圖像。第一圖像係假設為要藉由圖像處理裝置受理的圖像。第一圖像係例如為相較於第二圖像,就上述意義而言,會產生腦負荷的圖像。此外,第一圖像係為例如不能期待提昇娛樂性的圖像。 The first image storage unit 31 may store one or more first images. The first image is assumed to be an image to be accepted by the image processing apparatus. The first image is, for example, an image that produces a brain load in the above sense compared to the second image. Further, the first image is, for example, an image that cannot be expected to enhance entertainment.

第一圖像儲存部31雖以非揮發性儲存媒體為佳,但亦可用揮發性儲存媒體來實現。第一圖像儲存在第一圖像儲存部31之過程並非所問。第一圖像儲存部31之第一圖像亦可從例如第二圖像儲存部32之第二圖像來產生。亦即,例如由未圖示之裝置來降低第二圖像之亮度、或進行自動變更攝影機位置的模擬等來改變第二圖像之性質,以產生第一圖像。 The first image storage unit 31 is preferably a non-volatile storage medium, but may be realized by a volatile storage medium. The process of storing the first image in the first image storage unit 31 is not a question. The first image of the first image storage unit 31 may also be generated from, for example, the second image of the second image storage unit 32. That is, for example, the brightness of the second image is reduced by a device (not shown), or the simulation of the position of the camera is automatically changed to change the properties of the second image to generate a first image.

第二圖像儲存部32得儲存1個以上第二圖像。相對於第一圖像,第二圖像係為經依目的而調整腦負荷的圖像。例如,第二圖像為較第一圖像能減低腦負荷的圖像。此外,例如,第二圖像為相較於第一圖像已獲得増加娛樂性的圖像。再者,例如,第二圖像為在另一環境拍攝一個對象所取得之圖像。 The second image storage unit 32 has to store one or more second images. The second image is an image that adjusts the brain load according to the purpose with respect to the first image. For example, the second image is an image that reduces brain load compared to the first image. Further, for example, the second image is an image that has been more entertaining than the first image. Also, for example, the second image is an image taken by capturing an object in another environment.

第二圖像和第一圖像係為針對相同對象的圖像。第二圖像和第一圖像通常為相同畫素數,但亦可為不同畫素數。 The second image and the first image are images for the same object. The second image and the first image are usually the same number of pixels, but may also be different pixels.

第二圖像儲存部32雖以非揮發性儲存媒體為佳,但亦可用揮發性儲存媒體來實現。第二圖像儲存於第二圖像儲存部32之過程並非所問。第二圖像儲存部32之第二圖像可為例如從第一圖像儲存部31之第一圖像 來產生。亦即,例如由未圖示之裝置將第一圖像之亮度提高、或進行自動變更攝影機位置之模擬等來改變第一圖像之性質,以產生第二圖像。 The second image storage unit 32 is preferably a non-volatile storage medium, but may be implemented by a volatile storage medium. The process of storing the second image in the second image storage unit 32 is not a question. The second image of the second image storage unit 32 may be, for example, the first image from the first image storage unit 31 To produce. That is, for example, the brightness of the first image is increased by a device (not shown), or the simulation of the position of the camera is automatically changed to change the properties of the first image to generate a second image.

第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33可與1個以上各第一圖像相對應地儲存1個以上第二圖像資訊候補集合。第二圖像資訊候補集合係為2個以上第二圖像資訊之候補的集合。所謂第二圖像資訊,係為有關第二圖像之資訊。再者,第二圖像資訊可為第二圖像,亦可為第二圖像之1個以上屬性等。圖像之屬性為例如拍攝參數或1個以上特徵量。此外,2個以上各第二圖像資訊之候補係為具有相對應關係之第一圖像和針對相同對象之第二圖像的圖像資訊。第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33亦可在物理性上包含第一圖像儲存部31。同時,所謂「與第一圖像具有相對應關係」,可為直接與第一圖像相對應,也可為間接與第一圖像相對應。間接的對應係指例如對應於第一圖像資訊之情形。第一圖像資訊為有關於第一圖像之資訊,例如第一圖像本身、或第一圖像之屬性等。 The second image information candidate set storage unit 33 can store one or more second image information candidate sets in association with one or more first images. The second image information candidate set is a set of candidates of two or more second image information. The second image information is information about the second image. Furthermore, the second image information may be the second image, or may be one or more attributes of the second image. The attributes of the image are, for example, shooting parameters or one or more feature quantities. In addition, the candidate of the two or more second image information is the first image having the corresponding relationship and the image information of the second image for the same object. The second image information candidate set storage unit 33 may physically include the first image storage unit 31. Meanwhile, the phrase "corresponding to the first image" may correspond to the first image directly or indirectly to the first image. An indirect correspondence refers to, for example, a situation corresponding to the first image information. The first image information is information about the first image, such as the first image itself, or the attributes of the first image, and the like.

第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33以非揮發性儲存媒體為佳,但亦可用揮發性儲存媒體來實現。第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存於第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33之過程並非所問。 The second image information candidate set storage unit 33 is preferably a non-volatile storage medium, but may be implemented by a volatile storage medium. The process of storing the second image information candidate set in the second image information candidate set storage unit 33 is not a problem.

候補輸出部34係將儲存於第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33的1個以上第二圖像資訊候補集合予以輸出。指示受理部103受理輸出第二圖像資訊候補集合之指示時,候補輸出部34亦可將儲存於第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33的1個以上第二圖像資訊候補集合輸出。此處之所謂輸出,通常係向顯示器之顯示、使用投影機之投影,且包含向外部裝置或其他程式之發送訊號等概念。 The candidate output unit 34 outputs one or more second image information candidate sets stored in the second image information candidate set storage unit 33. When the instruction accepting unit 103 receives the instruction to output the second image information candidate set, the candidate output unit 34 may output one or more second image information candidate sets stored in the second image information candidate set storage unit 33. The so-called output here is usually the display to the display, the projection of the projector, and the concept of transmitting signals to an external device or other program.

第二圖像積存部35係將與對應於指示受理部103所受理之指示的1個以上各第二圖像資訊的候補相對應之1個以上第二圖像,和對應於第二圖像資訊候補集合之第一圖像相對應地積存第二圖像儲存部32。例如,第二圖像資訊為第二圖像時,第二圖像積存部35係將對應於指示受理部103所受理之指示的1個以上第二圖像,和第一圖像相對應地積存於第二圖像儲存部32。再者,例如,第二圖像資訊為圖像之屬性時,第二圖像積存部35係使用該圖像之屬性來構成第二圖像,並且和第一圖像相對應地 積存於第二圖像儲存部32。第二圖像積存部35通常得由MPU或記憶體等來實現。第二圖像積存部35之處理程序通常以軟體來實現,而該軟體係儲存於ROMM等儲存媒體。但也可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The second image storage unit 35 is one or more second images corresponding to candidates for one or more pieces of second image information corresponding to the instruction accepted by the instruction accepting unit 103, and corresponding to the second image. The first image of the information candidate set is stored in the second image storage unit 32 correspondingly. For example, when the second image information is the second image, the second image storage unit 35 associates one or more second images corresponding to the instruction received by the instruction accepting unit 103 with the first image. It is stored in the second image storage unit 32. Furthermore, for example, when the second image information is an attribute of the image, the second image storage unit 35 constructs the second image using the attributes of the image, and corresponds to the first image. It is stored in the second image storage unit 32. The second image storage unit 35 is usually implemented by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the second image storage unit 35 is usually implemented by software, and the soft system is stored in a storage medium such as a ROMM. But it can also be implemented with hardware (dedicated circuit).

第一圖像相關資訊取得部36係從第一圖像儲存部31之1個以上第一圖像取得1個以上第一圖像相關資訊。第一圖像相關資訊係為有關於第一圖像之全部或一部分的資訊。第一圖像相關資訊為例如從第一圖像之全部或一部分抽出之1個以上特徵量。此外,1個以上特徵量具有為1個以上第一圖像之一部分特徵量的近傍特徵量、及為1個以上第一圖像整體之特徵量的整體特徵量。近傍特徵量與整體特徵量的例子已於上文中陳述,其說明容予省略。再者,第一圖像相關資訊也可為將上述之1個以上特徵量縮退(degeneration)之資訊。這種縮退之資訊亦為特徵量。 The first image related information acquisition unit 36 acquires one or more first image related information from one or more first images of the first image storage unit 31. The first image related information is information about all or a part of the first image. The first image related information is, for example, one or more feature quantities extracted from all or a part of the first image. Further, one or more feature amounts have a near feature quantity that is one of the one or more first image partial feature amounts, and an overall feature quantity that is a feature quantity of one or more first images as a whole. Examples of the near feature quantity and the overall feature quantity have been set forth above, and the description thereof is omitted. Furthermore, the first image related information may be information that degenerates one or more of the above feature quantities. This retracted information is also a feature quantity.

第一圖像相關資訊取得部36通常得由MPU或記憶體等來實現。第一圖像相關資訊取得部36之處理程序通常用軟體來實現,而該軟體係儲存於ROM等儲存媒體。但亦可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The first image related information acquisition unit 36 is usually implemented by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the first image related information acquisition unit 36 is usually implemented by software, and the soft system is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. But it can also be implemented with hardware (dedicated circuit).

第二圖像相關資訊取得部37係從第二圖像儲存部32之1個以上第二圖像來取得1個以上第二圖像相關資訊。第二圖像相關資訊係為有關於第二圖像之全部或一部分的資訊。第二圖像相關資訊係為用以產生第二圖像之全部或一部分的資訊。例如,要加入到用以產生第二圖像之全部或一部分之演算式的參數群、或產生第二圖像之全部或一部分所需之演算式。第二圖像相關資訊也可為例如第二圖像之全部或一部分本身。第二圖像相關資訊例如為第二圖像之全部或一部分本身時,第二圖像相關資訊取得部37會進行將第二圖像分割成時空區塊的處理。 The second image related information acquisition unit 37 acquires one or more second image related information from one or more second images of the second image storage unit 32. The second image related information is information about all or a part of the second image. The second image related information is information used to generate all or a portion of the second image. For example, a parameter group to be used to generate a formula for all or a portion of the second image, or a calculation formula required to generate all or part of the second image. The second image related information may also be, for example, all or part of the second image itself. When the second image related information is, for example, all or part of the second image itself, the second image related information acquiring unit 37 performs a process of dividing the second image into spatiotemporal blocks.

第二圖像相關資訊取得部37通常得由MPU或記憶體等來實現。第二圖像相關資訊取得部37之處理程序通常係用軟體來實現,而該軟體係儲存於ROM等儲存媒體。但也可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The second image related information acquisition unit 37 is usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the second image related information acquisition unit 37 is usually implemented by software, and the soft system is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. But it can also be implemented with hardware (dedicated circuit).

查找表構成部38係構成具有1個或2個以上對應資訊的查找表。如上所述,對應資訊係為用以使1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分與1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分對應的資訊。再者,對應資訊係例如為使第一圖像相關資訊和第二圖像相關資訊具有對應關係的資訊。而且,對應 資訊係例如為具有第一圖像相關資訊與第二圖像相關資訊的資訊。此外,對應資訊之內容或構造並非所問。同時,此處有關對應於第一圖像相關資訊的第二圖像相關資訊,其作為第一圖像相關資訊之來源的第一圖像之全部或一部分、和作為第二圖像相關資訊之來源的第二圖像之全部或一部分,有構成影像之圖框圖像上的空間性位置相對應之情形、影像上之時間性位置相對應之情形、影像上之空間性及時間性位置相對應的情形。 The lookup table configuration unit 38 constitutes a lookup table having one or two or more pieces of corresponding information. As described above, the correspondence information is information for causing all or part of one or more first images to correspond to all or a part of one or more second images. Furthermore, the correspondence information is, for example, information that has a correspondence relationship between the first image related information and the second image related information. And corresponding The information is, for example, information having first image related information and second image related information. In addition, the content or structure of the corresponding information is not asked. Meanwhile, the second image related information corresponding to the first image related information, all or a part of the first image as the source of the first image related information, and the second image related information All or part of the second image of the source, the spatial position corresponding to the frame image constituting the image, the temporal position corresponding to the image, the spatial and temporal position of the image Corresponding situation.

查找表構成部38通常得由MPU或記憶體等來實現。第二圖像相關資訊取得部37之處理程序通常係用軟體來實現,而該軟體係儲存於ROM等儲存媒體。但也可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The lookup table configuration unit 38 is usually implemented by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the second image related information acquisition unit 37 is usually implemented by software, and the soft system is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. But it can also be implemented with hardware (dedicated circuit).

查找表積存部39係將查找表構成部38所構成的查找表積存在儲存部101。此外,此處所謂的積存,係包含寫入記憶體等情形。 The lookup table storage unit 39 stores the lookup table included in the lookup table configuration unit 38 in the storage unit 101. In addition, the so-called accumulation here includes a case of writing a memory or the like.

查找表積存部39通常得由MPU或記憶體等來實現。第二圖像相關資訊取得部37之處理程序通常係用軟體來實現,該軟體係儲存在ROM等儲存媒體。但,也可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The lookup table storage unit 39 is usually implemented by an MPU or a memory or the like. The processing program of the second image related information acquisition unit 37 is usually implemented by software, and the soft system is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. However, it can also be implemented by hardware (dedicated circuit).

其次,使用第12圖的流程圖來說明有關查找表取得裝置3中,使用者選擇對自身合適之第二圖像的動作。 Next, an operation of the user in selecting the second image suitable for itself in the lookup table acquisition device 3 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

(步驟S1201)指示受理部103判斷是否受理輸出第二圖像資訊候補集合之指示。若受理指示,即進到步驟S1202;若不受理這種指示,則回到步驟S1201。 (Step S1201) The instruction accepting unit 103 determines whether or not the instruction to output the second image information candidate set is accepted. If the instruction is accepted, the process proceeds to step S1202. If the instruction is not accepted, the process returns to step S1201.

(步驟S1202)候補輸出部34將1代入計數器i。 (Step S1202) The candidate output unit 34 substitutes 1 for the counter i.

(步驟S1203)候補輸出部34判斷第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33中是否存在第i個第二圖像資訊候補集合。若存在第i個第二圖像資訊候補集合,就到步驟S1204,若不存在第i個第二圖像資訊候補集合,則結束處理。 (Step S1203) The candidate output unit 34 determines whether or not the i-th second image information candidate set exists in the second image information candidate set storage unit 33. If there is an i-th second image information candidate set, the process goes to step S1204, and if the i-th second image information candidate set does not exist, the process ends.

(步驟S1204)候補輸出部34從第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33讀取並輸出第i個第二圖像資訊候補集合。 (Step S1204) The candidate output unit 34 reads and outputs the i-th second image information candidate set from the second image information candidate set storage unit 33.

(步驟S1205)指示受理部103判斷是否從第二圖像資訊候補集合所具有的2個以上第二圖像資訊之候補受理對於1個或2個以上第二圖像 資訊的選擇指示。若已受理選擇指示時,進到步驟S1206,若未受理這種選擇指示時,則回到步驟S1205。 (Step S1205) The instruction accepting unit 103 determines whether or not one or two or more second images are accepted from the candidates of the two or more second image information included in the second image information candidate set. Information selection instructions. If the selection instruction has been accepted, the process proceeds to step S1206. If the selection instruction has not been accepted, the process returns to step S1205.

(步驟S1206)第二圖像積存部35取得和步驟S1205所受理之指示相對應的1個以上第二圖像資訊之候補。 (Step S1206) The second image storage unit 35 acquires one or more candidates for the second image information corresponding to the instruction accepted in step S1205.

(步驟S1207)第二圖像積存部35使用步驟S1206所取得之第二圖像資訊,來取得第二圖像,並與第一圖像對應而積存在第二圖像儲存部32。該第一圖像為與第i個第二圖像資訊候補集合相對應之第一圖像。 (Step S1207) The second image storage unit 35 acquires the second image using the second image information acquired in step S1206, and accumulates in the second image storage unit 32 in association with the first image. The first image is a first image corresponding to the i-th second image information candidate set.

(步驟S1208)候補輸出部34將計數器i遞增1。回到步驟S1203。 (Step S1208) The candidate output unit 34 increments the counter i by one. Going back to step S1203.

接著,使用第13圖的流程圖來說明查找表取得裝置3構成查找表並進行積存的動作。此外,並與儲存於第一圖像儲存部31之各第一圖像相對應之第二圖像係儲存於第二圖像儲存部32。 Next, an operation of the lookup table acquisition means 3 to construct a lookup table and store it will be described using the flowchart of FIG. Further, the second image corresponding to each of the first images stored in the first image storage unit 31 is stored in the second image storage unit 32.

(步驟S1301)第一圖像相關資訊取得部36將1代入計數器i。 (Step S1301) The first image related information acquisition unit 36 substitutes 1 for the counter i.

(步驟S1302)第一圖像相關資訊取得部36判斷第i個第一圖像是否儲存於第一圖像儲存部31。若儲存有第i個第一圖像,進到步驟S1303,若未儲存,則結束處理。 (Step S1302) The first image related information acquisition unit 36 determines whether or not the i-th first image is stored in the first image storage unit 31. If the i-th first image is stored, the process proceeds to step S1303, and if not, the process ends.

(步驟S1303)第一圖像相關資訊取得部36從第一圖像儲存部31讀取第i個第一圖像。 (Step S1303) The first image related information acquisition unit 36 reads the i-th first image from the first image storage unit 31.

(步驟S1304)第一圖像相關資訊取得部36將步驟S1303所讀出之第i個第一圖像分割為區塊。接著,第一圖像相關資訊取得部36取得n個第一時空區塊。 (Step S1304) The first image related information acquisition unit 36 divides the i-th first image read in step S1303 into blocks. Next, the first image related information acquisition unit 36 acquires n first spatiotemporal blocks.

(步驟S1305)第二圖像相關資訊取得部37從第二圖像儲存部32讀取第i個第二圖像。 (Step S1305) The second image related information acquisition unit 37 reads the i-th second image from the second image storage unit 32.

(步驟S1306)第二圖像相關資訊取得部37將步驟S1305所讀取之第i個第二圖像分割為區塊。接著,第二圖像相關資訊取得部37取得n個第二時空區塊。 (Step S1306) The second image related information acquisition unit 37 divides the i-th second image read in step S1305 into blocks. Next, the second image related information acquisition unit 37 acquires n second spatiotemporal blocks.

(步驟S1307)查找表構成部38將1代入計數器j。 (Step S1307) The lookup table constructing unit 38 substitutes 1 into the counter j.

(步驟S1308)查找表構成部38判斷步驟S1304所取得之時空區塊中是否存在第j個區塊。若第j個區塊存在,進到步驟S1309,若第j個區塊不存在,則到步驟S1314。 (Step S1308) The lookup table constructing unit 38 judges whether or not the jth block exists in the spatiotemporal block obtained in step S1304. If the jth block exists, the process goes to step S1309, and if the jth block does not exist, it goes to step S1314.

(步驟S1309)第一圖像相關資訊取得部36從第i個第一圖像之第j區塊取得第一圖像相關資訊。 (Step S1309) The first image related information acquisition unit 36 acquires the first image related information from the jth block of the i-th first image.

(步驟S1310)第二圖像相關資訊取得部37從第i個第二圖像之第j區塊取得第二圖像相關資訊。 (Step S1310) The second image related information acquisition unit 37 acquires the second image related information from the jth block of the i-th second image.

(步驟S1311)查找表構成部38構成具有步驟S1309所取得之第一圖像相關資訊及步驟S1310所取得之第二圖像相關資訊的對應資訊。 (Step S1311) The lookup table configuration unit 38 constitutes correspondence information including the first image related information acquired in step S1309 and the second image related information obtained in step S1310.

(步驟S1312)查找表積存部39將步驟S1311所構成之對應資訊積存於儲存部101。 (Step S1312) The lookup table storage unit 39 accumulates the correspondence information constituted by the step S1311 in the storage unit 101.

(步驟S1313)查找表構成部38將計數器j遞增1。返回步驟S1308。 (Step S1313) The lookup table constructing unit 38 increments the counter j by one. The process returns to step S1308.

(步驟S1314)第一圖像相關資訊取得部36將計數器i遞增1。返回步驟S1302。 (Step S1314) The first image related information acquisition unit 36 increments the counter i by one. The process returns to step S1302.

以下說明有關本實施形態之查找表取得裝置3的具體動作。 The specific operation of the lookup table acquisition device 3 of the present embodiment will be described below.

首先,就查找表取得裝置3中受理來自使用者之選擇第二圖像的指示,並積存第二圖像之動作例加以說明。 First, an operation example in which the lookup table acquisition device 3 accepts an instruction to select a second image from the user and accumulates the second image will be described.

現在,如第14圖所示之複數個第二圖像資訊候補集合係儲存於第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33。此外,此處,係假設第二圖像資訊候補集合中,候補1之圖像為第一圖像。再者,第二圖像資訊候補集合中,候補1至候補4為第二圖像之候補。亦即,此處,第二圖像資訊係為第二圖像本身。 Now, a plurality of second image information candidate sets as shown in FIG. 14 are stored in the second image information candidate set storage unit 33. Further, here, it is assumed that the image of the candidate 1 is the first image in the second image information candidate set. Further, among the second image information candidate sets, the candidates 1 to 4 are candidates for the second image. That is, here, the second image information is the second image itself.

接著,使用者將輸出第二圖像資訊候補集合之指示輸入到查找表取得裝置3,然後由指示受理部103受理將第二圖像資訊候補集合輸出之指示。 Next, the user inputs an instruction to output the second image information candidate set to the lookup table acquisition means 3, and the instruction accepting unit 103 accepts an instruction to output the second image information candidate set.

其次,候補輸出部34讀取並輸出第1個第二圖像資訊候補集合(第14圖之「ID=1」之儲存圖像之集合)。這種第二圖像資訊候補集合之輸出例為第15圖。 Next, the candidate output unit 34 reads and outputs the first second image information candidate set (the set of the stored images of "ID=1" in Fig. 14). An example of the output of such a second image information candidate set is Fig. 15.

繼之,使用者輸入符合自己喜好之圖像的選擇指示(例如,「4」)。接著,指示受理部103受理指示(例如,「4」)。 Next, the user enters a selection indication (eg, "4") that matches the image of his or her preference. Next, the instruction accepting unit 103 accepts an instruction (for example, "4").

然後,第二圖像積存部35取得與指示相對應之第4個圖像,並積存於第二圖像儲存部32。 Then, the second image storage unit 35 acquires the fourth image corresponding to the instruction and stores it in the second image storage unit 32.

對於其他的第二圖像資訊候補集合,亦進行以上之處理,使使用者所喜好的第二圖像積存於第二圖像儲存部32。 For the other second image information candidate sets, the above processing is also performed, so that the second image that the user likes is stored in the second image storage unit 32.

然後,說明有關查找表取得裝置3構成並積存查找表的具體動作。此處,係使用7個具體例來說明。 Next, a specific operation of the lookup table acquisition means 3 and storing the lookup table will be described. Here, seven specific examples are used for explanation.

(具體例1) (Specific example 1)

具體例1係為用不同光量之光源對相同的被拍攝對象進行拍攝,並使用所取得之第一圖像和第二圖像的例子。 The specific example 1 is an example in which the same subject is photographed with a light source of a different light amount, and the obtained first image and second image are used.

首先,將光量A的光源照在一個被拍攝對象,用未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,以取得第一圖像,並積存在第一圖像儲存部31。再以光量B(光量B>光量A)的光源照在前述一個被拍攝對象,用未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,以取得第二圖像,並積存在第二圖像儲存部32。此種情形中,第二圖像係為相較於第一圖像得以減低腦負荷的圖像。而且,目視,以感覺第二圖像的品位比第一圖像高的情形為佳。所謂感覺品位高的圖像,係為表現出被拍攝對象之質感、遠近感、空氣感、温熱感、透明感、新鮮感、或高級感等的圖像。 First, the light source of the light amount A is irradiated onto one subject, and is photographed by an imaging device (not shown) to acquire the first image and accumulated in the first image storage unit 31. Further, the light source B (light amount B > light amount A) is irradiated onto the one subject, and is imaged by an imaging device (not shown) to acquire a second image and accumulated in the second image storage unit 32. In this case, the second image is an image in which the brain load is reduced compared to the first image. Moreover, it is preferable to visually feel that the taste of the second image is higher than the first image. The image having a high perceived quality is an image showing the texture, the sense of distance, the sense of air, the warmth, the transparency, the freshness, or the high-grade feeling of the subject.

此外,改變光源之光量進行拍攝的被拍攝對象,以採用自然、人類、動物、静物等多種較佳。而且,依被拍攝對象,也可有光源之光量的變更程度不同的情形,應無庸贅言。 Further, the subject to be photographed by changing the amount of light of the light source is preferably a natural, human, animal, still life, or the like. Further, depending on the subject, there may be cases where the degree of change in the amount of light of the light source is different, and it is needless to say.

藉由上述方式,即得以建立第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32。 By the above manner, the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 can be created.

其次,第一圖像相關資訊取得部36從第一圖像儲存部31依序讀取第一圖像。接著,第一圖像相關資訊取得部36將第一圖像分割為區塊,而獲得n個第一時空區塊。此外,複數個第一時空區塊亦可存在重複的區域。亦即,第一圖像相關資訊取得部36進行的分割處理和分割部105所進行之分割處理係為相同的處理。 Next, the first image related information acquisition unit 36 sequentially reads the first image from the first image storage unit 31. Next, the first image related information acquisition unit 36 divides the first image into blocks, and obtains n first spatiotemporal blocks. In addition, a plurality of first space-time blocks may also have overlapping regions. In other words, the division processing by the first image related information acquisition unit 36 and the division processing performed by the division unit 105 are the same processing.

同時,第二圖像相關資訊取得部37也從第二圖像儲存部32讀取與第一圖像相對應的第二圖像。接著,第二圖像相關資訊取得部37將第二圖像分割為區塊,而獲得n個第二時空區塊。 At the same time, the second image related information acquisition unit 37 also reads the second image corresponding to the first image from the second image storage unit 32. Next, the second image related information acquisition unit 37 divides the second image into blocks to obtain n second spatiotemporal blocks.

其次,第一圖像相關資訊取得部36從第一圖像之各區塊取得複數個畫素之最大值及最小值、動態範圍、亮度度數分布、時間方向之差分值(例如,和剛剛先前圖場之對應畫素的差分值)等。這種資訊係為特徵量向量,為第一圖像相關資訊。第一圖像相關資訊按每個區塊取得。 Next, the first image related information acquisition unit 36 acquires the maximum value and the minimum value of the plurality of pixels, the dynamic range, the luminance power number distribution, and the time direction difference value from each block of the first image (for example, and just before The difference value of the corresponding pixel of the field) and so on. This information is a feature quantity vector and is the first image related information. The first image related information is obtained for each block.

接著,第二圖像相關資訊取得部37從第二圖像之各區塊取得產生區塊所需之1個以上參數。具體而言,第二圖像相關資訊取得部37取得例如第二圖像之各區塊的特徵向量,將該特徵向量代入演算式,而取得1個以上參數。此外,1個以上參數係為第二圖像相關資訊的例子。 Next, the second image related information acquisition unit 37 acquires one or more parameters required to generate a block from each block of the second image. Specifically, the second image related information acquisition unit 37 acquires, for example, the feature vector of each block of the second image, and substitutes the feature vector into the calculation formula to acquire one or more parameters. Further, one or more parameters are examples of the second image related information.

其次,查找表構成部38會按每個區塊來構成具有第一圖像相關資訊與第二圖像相關資訊的對應資訊。然後,由查找表積存部39將所構成之對應資訊積存於儲存部101。 Next, the lookup table constructing unit 38 constructs corresponding information having the first image related information and the second image related information for each of the blocks. Then, the corresponding correspondence information is stored in the storage unit 101 by the lookup table storage unit 39.

透過以上的處理,具有多數個對應資訊之查找表即得以產生。此外,亦可將相同或近似之第一圖像相關資訊歸納為一個對應資訊。 Through the above processing, a lookup table having a plurality of corresponding information is generated. In addition, the same or similar first image related information may also be summarized into one corresponding information.

(具體例2) (Specific example 2)

具體例2係為使用不同顏色之光源對相同的被拍攝對象進行拍攝,並使用所取得之第一圖像和第二圖像的例子。 The specific example 2 is an example in which the same subject is photographed using a light source of a different color, and the obtained first image and second image are used.

首先,對一個被拍攝對象照射X顏色(例如白色)的光源,用未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,以取得第一圖像,並積存於第一圖像儲存部31。而且,對前述一個被拍攝對象照射Y顏色(例如橙色)的光源,用未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,以取得第二圖像,並積存於第二圖像儲存部32。在此種情況下,從人類的角度來看,必須感覺第二圖像的品位比第一圖像高。 First, a light source that emits an X color (for example, white) to a subject is imaged by an imaging device (not shown) to acquire a first image, and is stored in the first image storage unit 31. Then, a light source that emits a Y color (for example, orange) to the subject is imaged by an imaging device (not shown) to acquire a second image, and is stored in the second image storage unit 32. In this case, from a human point of view, it is necessary to feel that the second image has a higher grade than the first image.

此外,改變光源顏色進行拍攝的被拍攝對象以採用自然、人類、動物、静物等多種較佳。而且,依被拍攝對象,光源顏色的變更程度亦可不同,應無庸贅言。 In addition, the subject to be photographed by changing the color of the light source is preferably a natural, human, animal, still life, or the like. Moreover, depending on the subject, the degree of change in the color of the light source may be different, and it is needless to say.

依以上方式,即得以建立第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32。此外,第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32建立後之處理係與具體例1相同,故其說明容予省略。 In the above manner, the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 can be created. The processing after the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 are established is the same as that of the specific example 1, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

(具體例3) (Specific example 3)

具體例3為用配置於不同位置之光源,對相同的被拍攝對象進行拍攝,並使用所取得之第一圖像和第二圖像的例子。 The specific example 3 is an example in which the same subject is photographed by a light source disposed at a different position, and the obtained first image and second image are used.

首先,將設置在位置α的光源照射於一個被拍攝對象,以未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,而取得第一圖像,並積存於第一圖像儲存部31。而且,將設置於位置β(相較於設置在位置α之情況,產生較多被拍攝對象之陰背面的位置)的光源照射於前述一個被拍攝對象,以未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,而取得第二圖像,並積存於第二圖像儲存部32。在此種情況下,就人來看,第二圖像產生之被拍攝對象之陰背面區域必須比第一圖像多,而更能感受到被拍攝對象的立體感。 First, a light source provided at the position α is irradiated onto one subject, and an image is taken by an imaging device (not shown) to acquire a first image and stored in the first image storage unit 31. Further, a light source provided at the position β (a position where a large back surface of the subject is generated compared to the position at the position α) is irradiated onto the one subject, and is imaged by an imaging device (not shown). The second image is acquired and stored in the second image storage unit 32. In this case, as far as the person is concerned, the negative image area of the subject produced by the second image must be larger than the first image, and the stereoscopic effect of the subject can be more felt.

再者,改變光源之位置進行拍攝之被拍攝對象,以採用自然、人類、動物、静物等多數種類較佳。此外,依被拍攝對象,光源位置之變更程度亦可不同,應無庸贅言。 Furthermore, it is preferable to use a natural light, a human, an animal, a still life, and the like to change the position of the light source to be photographed. In addition, depending on the subject, the degree of change in the position of the light source may vary, and it should be understood.

依以上方式,即得以建立第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32。此外,第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32建立後之處理係與具體例1相同,故其說明容予省略。 In the above manner, the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 can be created. The processing after the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 are established is the same as that of the specific example 1, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

(具體例4) (Specific example 4)

具體例4為以光量不同且配置於不同位置之光源,對相同的被拍攝對象進行拍攝,並使用所取得之第一圖像和第二圖像的例子。 The specific example 4 is an example in which the same subject is photographed with a light source having different light amounts and disposed at different positions, and the obtained first image and second image are used.

首先,將配置於位置α且具有光量A之光源照射於一個被拍攝對象,以未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,而取得第一圖像,並積存於第一圖像儲存部31。而且,將配置於位置β且具有光量B(光量B>光量A)之光源照射於前述一個被拍攝對象,以未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,而取得第二 圖像,並積存於第二圖像儲存部32。此種情況下,就人來看,已感覺第二圖像之品位比第一圖像高之情形較為合適。 First, a light source disposed at the position α and having the light amount A is irradiated onto one subject, and is photographed by an imaging device (not shown) to acquire a first image and stored in the first image storage unit 31. Further, a light source disposed at the position β and having the light amount B (light amount B>light amount A) is irradiated onto the one subject, and is imaged by an imaging device (not shown) to obtain a second image. The image is stored in the second image storage unit 32. In this case, it is more appropriate for a person to feel that the taste of the second image is higher than the first image.

再者,改變光源之光量進行拍攝之被拍攝對象以採用自然、人類、動物、静物等多數種類為佳。 Further, it is preferable that the subject to be photographed by changing the amount of light of the light source is natural, human, animal, still life, and the like.

依以上方式,即得以建立第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32。此外,第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32建立後之處理係與具體例1相同,故其說明容予省略。 In the above manner, the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 can be created. The processing after the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 are established is the same as that of the specific example 1, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

(具體例5) (Specific example 5)

具體例5係為在天候、温度、濕度中之1項以上因素不同的環境下,對相同的被拍攝對象進行拍攝,使用所取得之第一圖像和第二圖像的例子。 The specific example 5 is an example in which the same subject is photographed in an environment in which one or more factors of weather, temperature, and humidity are different, and the obtained first image and second image are used.

首先,在天氣「陰」、温度「25度」、濕度「40%」的環境下,將光源照射在一個被拍攝對象,以未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,而取得第一圖像,並積存於第一圖像儲存部31。而且,在天氣「陰」、温度「22度」、濕度「70%」的環境下,將光源照射在前述一個被拍攝對象,以未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,而取得第二圖像,並積存於第二圖像儲存部32。在這種情況,就目視來看,第二圖像通常比較能讓人感受到遠近感、穩重感等。 First, in an environment where the weather is "female", the temperature is "25 degrees", and the humidity is "40%", the light source is irradiated onto one subject, and the image is taken by an imaging device (not shown) to obtain the first image. It is stored in the first image storage unit 31. Further, in an environment where the weather is "female", the temperature is "22 degrees", and the humidity is "70%", the light source is irradiated onto the one subject, and the image is taken by an imaging device (not shown) to obtain a second image. And stored in the second image storage unit 32. In this case, from a visual point of view, the second image is usually more likely to feel a sense of distance, stability, and the like.

依以上方式,即得以建立第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32。再者,第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32建立後之處理係與具體例1相同,故其說明容予省略。 In the above manner, the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 can be created. The processing of the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 is the same as that of the specific example 1, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

此外,同樣地,首先,在天氣「陰」、温度「25度」、濕度「40%」的環境下將光源照射於一個被拍攝對象,以未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,而取得第一圖像,並積存於第一圖像儲存部31。另外,在天氣「晴」、温度「28度」、濕度「20%」的環境下,將光源照射於前述一個被拍攝對象,以未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,而取得第二圖像,並積存於第二圖像儲存部32。在這種情況,就人來看,第二圖像通常比較能讓人感受到空氣感-温暖感等。 In the same manner, first, the light source is irradiated onto one subject in an environment of "female", "25 degrees", and "40%", and the image is taken by an imaging device (not shown) to obtain the first image. The image is stored in the first image storage unit 31. Further, in an environment where the weather is "clear", the temperature is "28 degrees", and the humidity is "20%", the light source is irradiated onto the one subject, and the image is taken by an imaging device (not shown) to obtain a second image. And stored in the second image storage unit 32. In this case, as far as people are concerned, the second image is usually more sensible to the sense of air - warmth and the like.

依以上方式,即得以建立第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32。再者,第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32建立後之處理係與具體例1相同,故其說明容予省略。 In the above manner, the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 can be created. The processing of the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 is the same as that of the specific example 1, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

(具體例6) (Specific example 6)

具體例6為使用以可拍攝不同景深之圖像的拍攝裝置所取得的第一圖像和第二圖像的例子。 The specific example 6 is an example in which a first image and a second image obtained by an imaging device capable of capturing images of different depths of field are used.

首先,使用用以拍攝景深較淺圖像的拍攝裝置,將光源照射於一個被拍攝對象,而取得第一圖像,並積存於第一圖像儲存部31。而且,使用拍攝景深較深圖像的拍攝裝置,將光源照射於前述一個被拍攝對象,用未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,而取得第二圖像,並積存於第二圖像儲存部32。在這種情況,就人來看,由於焦點能更整體地對準,故第二圖像通常可以讓人感到清晰感已有提昇。而且,第二圖像在縱深所產生的利落層次感會有増加,通常可獲得縱深感與立體感。 First, a photographing device for photographing a shallower depth image is used, and a light source is irradiated onto one subject to obtain a first image, which is stored in the first image storage unit 31. Further, an imaging device that photographs a deep-depth image is used, and a light source is irradiated onto the one subject, and is captured by an imaging device (not shown) to acquire a second image and stored in the second image storage unit 32. . In this case, as far as people are concerned, since the focus can be more aligned overall, the second image can usually make people feel clear and has improved. Moreover, the sense of levelness of the second image in the depth will increase, and a sense of depth and a sense of three-dimensionality are generally obtained.

依以上方式,即得以建立第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32。再者,第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32建立後之處理係與具體例1相同,故其說明容予省略。 In the above manner, the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 can be created. The processing of the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 is the same as that of the specific example 1, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

(具體例7) (Specific example 7)

具體例7為使用以不同快門速度之拍攝裝置所取得之第一圖像和第二圖像的例子。 Specific Example 7 is an example of using a first image and a second image obtained by a photographing device having different shutter speeds.

將光源照射於一個被拍攝對象,以快門速度較慢(快門速度=A)的拍攝裝置,取得第一圖像,並積存於第一圖像儲存部31。而且,將光源照射於前述一個被拍攝對象,以快門速度較快(快門速度=B,A<B)的拍攝裝置,用未圖示之拍攝裝置進行拍攝,而取得第二圖像,並積存於第二圖像儲存部32。在這種情況,就人來看,第二圖像通常較能讓人感受到速度感或躍動感已有増加。 The light source is irradiated onto one subject, and the first image is acquired by the imaging device having a slow shutter speed (shutter speed=A), and is stored in the first image storage unit 31. Further, the light source is irradiated onto the one subject, and an imaging device having a fast shutter speed (shutter speed=B, A<B) is imaged by an imaging device (not shown) to acquire a second image and accumulate The second image storage unit 32. In this case, as far as people are concerned, the second image is usually more sensible to feel the sense of speed or leaps.

依以上方式,即得以建立第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32。再者,第一圖像儲存部31和第二圖像儲存部32建立後之處理係與具體例1相同,故其說明容予省略。 In the above manner, the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 can be created. The processing of the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 is the same as that of the specific example 1, and therefore the description thereof will be omitted.

如以上所述,若依本實施形態,即能自動取得可利用於用以產生經依目的而調整腦負荷之圖像的查找表。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically obtain a lookup table that can be used to generate an image in which the brain load is adjusted depending on the purpose.

此外,若依本實施形態,為圖像視聽者之使用者若使用查找表取得裝置3製作查找表,即可為自己獲致可輸出經依目的而調整腦負荷之圖像的查找表。 Further, according to the present embodiment, if the user of the image viewer uses the lookup table acquisition device 3 to create a lookup table, the user can obtain a lookup table that can output an image whose brain load is adjusted according to the purpose.

而且,若依本實施形態,如按每個使用者屬性(30歲前、60歲以上、女性、男性、高中生等),進行由1個以上使用者選擇第二圖像之處理,即得以按每個使用者屬性製作查找表。而且,使用以此方式製作之查找表的圖像處理裝置(例如電視接收機),可按每個使用者屬性輸出經調整腦負荷之圖像,以符合自己的喜好。 Further, according to the present embodiment, the processing of selecting the second image by one or more users is performed for each user attribute (before 30 years old, 60 years old or older, female, male, high school student, etc.). Make a lookup table for each user attribute. Moreover, an image processing apparatus (for example, a television receiver) using a lookup table fabricated in this manner can output an image of the adjusted brain load for each user attribute to suit his or her preference.

再者,本實施形態之查找表取得裝置3中,亦可不具備第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部33、指示受理部103、候補輸出部34、第二圖像積存部35等部分構成元,應無庸贅言。 Further, in the lookup table acquisition device 3 of the present embodiment, some components such as the second image information candidate set storage unit 33, the instruction accepting unit 103, the candidate output unit 34, and the second image storage unit 35 may not be provided. There should be no rumors.

此外,使用本實施形態之查找表取得裝置3所取得的查找表,適於複製並利用在實施形態1、2所說明之圖像處理裝置。 Further, the lookup table obtained by the lookup table acquisition device 3 of the present embodiment is suitable for copying and using the image processing devices described in the first and second embodiments.

此外,實現本實施形態之查找表取得裝置的軟體係為如以下所述之程式。亦即,該程式係為在儲存媒體中儲存有1個以上第一圖像、及和前述1個以上各第一圖像相對應之1個以上各第二圖像,而各該第二圖像相較於第一圖像,係為經調整腦負荷之圖像,且為有關於與前述1個以上各第一圖像相同對象之圖像,藉以使電腦作為:第一圖像相關資訊取得部,從前述1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分取得1個以上第一圖像相關資訊,該第一圖像相關資訊係有關儲存在前述儲存媒體之1個以上第一圖像的全部或一部分的資訊;第二圖像相關資訊取得部,從前述1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分取得1個以上第二圖像相關資訊,該第二圖像相關資訊係為有關儲存於前述儲存媒體之1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分的資訊;查找表構成部,將顯示有前述1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分與前述1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊構成1個或2個以上查找表,且該對應資訊具有:前述第一圖像相關資訊取得部所取得之第一圖像相關資訊、和與該第一圖像相關資訊相對應且為前述第二圖像相 關資訊取得部所取得之第二圖像相關資訊;及查找表積存部,將前述查找表構成部所構成之查找表積存於儲存媒體,而發揮功能之程式。 Further, the soft system for realizing the lookup table acquisition device of the present embodiment is a program as described below. That is, the program is one or more first images stored in the storage medium and one or more second images corresponding to the one or more first images, and each of the second images Compared with the first image, the image is an image with adjusted brain load, and is an image related to the same object as the first or more first images, so that the computer is used as the first image related information. The acquisition unit acquires one or more first image related information from all or part of the one or more first images, wherein the first image related information is related to one or more first images stored in the storage medium All or part of the information; the second image related information acquisition unit acquires one or more second image related information from all or part of the one or more second images, and the second image related information is related to storage Information of all or part of one or more second images of the storage medium; the lookup table forming unit displays all or part of the one or more first images and all of the one or more second images Or a corresponding corresponding information structure One or more lookup tables, and the corresponding information has: first image related information obtained by the first image related information obtaining unit, and corresponding to the first image related information, and the second Image phase The second image related information obtained by the information acquisition unit; and the lookup table storage unit, which stores a lookup table formed by the lookup table configuration unit in a storage medium and functions as a program.

再者,上述程式較佳為,儲存媒體復儲存有1個以上第二圖像資訊候補集合,該第二圖像資訊候補集合係為與1個以上各第一圖像相對應,且為有關與該1個以上各第一圖像相同對象之2個以上第二圖像之候補的集合,使電腦作為:候補輸出部,輸出前述1個以上第二圖像資訊候補集合;指示受理部,用以受理在前述候補輸出部所輸出之1個以上各第二圖像資訊候補集合所具有之2個以上第二圖像之候補中,選擇1個以上第二圖像之候補的指示;及第二圖像積存部,使與前述指示受理部所受理之指示相對應之1個以上第二圖像的候補,和對應於第二圖像資訊候補集合的第一圖像形成對應關係,並積存於前述第二圖像儲存部,而發揮功能之程式。 Furthermore, the program preferably stores one or more second image information candidate sets stored in the storage medium, wherein the second image information candidate set corresponds to one or more first images, and is related to a set of candidates of two or more second images that are identical to the one or more first images, and a computer as a candidate output unit that outputs the one or more second image information candidate sets; and an instruction receiving unit; And an instruction to select one or more candidates for the second image in the candidate of the two or more second images included in the one or more second image information candidate sets output by the candidate output unit; and The second image storage unit forms a correspondence between one or more second image candidates corresponding to the instruction received by the instruction accepting unit and the first image corresponding to the second image information candidate set, and A program that functions in the second image storage unit and functions.

(實施形態4) (Embodiment 4)

本實施形態中,係再就使用查找表取得裝置3來產生查找表之處理的具體例加以說明。 In the present embodiment, a specific example of the process of generating the lookup table by using the lookup table acquisition means 3 will be described.

本具體例係為構成查找表之對應資訊為特徵量向量和圖像之轉換過濾器的情形。此外,所謂特徵量向量,係為從輸入圖像(第一圖像)抽出的資訊。再者,圖像之轉換過濾器係為例如1個以上過濾器係數之集合。 This specific example is a case where the correspondence information constituting the lookup table is a feature quantity vector and an image conversion filter. Further, the feature amount vector is information extracted from an input image (first image). Furthermore, the image conversion filter is, for example, a set of one or more filter coefficients.

現在,第一圖像儲存部31中儲存有例如以第16圖所示之景深較淺的第一圖像為首的多數圖像。再者,第二圖像儲存部32中儲存有例如第17圖所示之景深較深的第二圖像為首的多數圖像。此外,某些第一圖像和某些第二圖像係具有對應關係。亦即,例如第16圖之第一圖像和第17圖之第二圖像即具有對應關係。 Now, the first image storage unit 31 stores, for example, a plurality of images including the first image having a shallow depth of field shown in FIG. Further, in the second image storage unit 32, for example, a plurality of images including the second image having a deep depth of field shown in FIG. 17 are stored. In addition, some of the first images and some of the second images have a corresponding relationship. That is, for example, the first image of FIG. 16 and the second image of FIG. 17 have a corresponding relationship.

而且,第二圖像之景深較第一圖像為深。此外,第16圖之景深較淺,焦距係對著圖像前方的紅色車(深色車)。另一方面,第17圖之景深較深,焦距係對著圖像後方的黄色車(淺色車)。再說,一般而言,相較於第一圖像,景深較深的第二圖像,整體圖像較容易理解,可說是腦部負荷較少的較佳圖像。 Moreover, the depth of field of the second image is deeper than the first image. In addition, the depth of field in Figure 16 is shallow, and the focal length is opposite the red car (dark car) in front of the image. On the other hand, the depth of field in Figure 17 is deep, and the focal length is opposite the yellow car (light car) behind the image. Furthermore, in general, compared with the first image, the second image with a deeper depth of field, the overall image is easier to understand, and can be said to be a better image with less brain load.

這種狀況下,假設從使用者輸入建立查找表的指示。接著,第一圖像相關資訊取得部36會從第一圖像儲存部31讀取第一圖像(此處,例如為第16圖)。然後,第一圖像相關資訊取得部36會將第一圖像分割,並取得複數個時空區塊。此處,如第18圖所示,第一圖像相關資訊取得部36會將第一圖像分割為16個,而取得16個第一時空區塊。此外,第18圖中,各第一時空區塊均記載有區塊識別符。 In this case, it is assumed that an instruction to establish a lookup table is input from the user. Next, the first image related information acquisition unit 36 reads the first image from the first image storage unit 31 (here, for example, FIG. 16). Then, the first image related information acquisition unit 36 divides the first image and acquires a plurality of spatiotemporal blocks. Here, as shown in FIG. 18, the first image related information acquisition unit 36 divides the first image into 16 and acquires 16 first spatiotemporal blocks. Further, in Fig. 18, each of the first space-time blocks is described with a block identifier.

其次,第二圖像相關資訊取得部37會從第二圖像儲存部32讀取第二圖像(此處,例如為第17圖)。然後,第二圖像相關資訊取得部37會將第二圖像分割,而取得複數個時空區塊。此處,如第19圖所示,第二圖像相關資訊取得部37會將第二圖像分割為16個,而取得16個第二時空區塊。此外,第19圖中,各第二時空區塊均記載有區塊識別符。 Next, the second image related information acquisition unit 37 reads the second image from the second image storage unit 32 (here, for example, FIG. 17). Then, the second image related information acquisition unit 37 divides the second image to obtain a plurality of spatiotemporal blocks. Here, as shown in Fig. 19, the second image related information acquisition unit 37 divides the second image into 16 and acquires 16 second spatiotemporal blocks. Further, in Fig. 19, the block identifier is described in each of the second space-time blocks.

接著,查找表構成部38會使用例如最小平方估算法(least squares estimate)計算將第一圖像之第1個第一時空區塊轉換為第二圖像之第1個第二時空區塊之轉換過濾器的過濾器係數。 Next, the lookup table constructing unit 38 converts the first first spatiotemporal block of the first image into the first second spatiotemporal block of the second image using, for example, a least squares estimate. The filter factor of the conversion filter.

同樣地,查找表構成部38會依序使用例如最小平方估算法計算將第一圖像之第n個(n為2至16)第一時空區塊轉換為第二圖像之第n個(n為2至16)第二時空區塊之轉換過濾器的過濾器係數。 Similarly, the lookup table constructing unit 38 sequentially converts the nth (n is 2 to 16) first spatiotemporal block of the first image into the nth of the second image using, for example, the least squares estimation method ( n is the filter coefficient of the conversion filter of the second space-time block of 2 to 16).

依以上方式,即可獲得16種圖像轉換過濾器之過濾器係數。此外,第20圖為說明查找表構成部38之執行動作的概念圖。第20圖中,F04表示第4個圖像轉換過濾器,F15表示第15個圖像轉換過濾器。 In the above manner, the filter coefficients of the 16 image conversion filters can be obtained. In addition, FIG. 20 is a conceptual diagram for explaining an execution operation of the lookup table configuration unit 38. In Fig. 20, F 04 denotes a fourth image conversion filter, and F 15 denotes a 15th image conversion filter.

其次,查找表構成部38會取得第一圖像之16個各第一時空區塊之近傍特徵量。此外,例如查找表構成部38會對各第一時空區塊使用離散傅立業轉換(discrete fourier transform)計算頻率成分,而取得各個帯域的冪次(power)。將該各個帯域之冪次作為近傍特徵量之特徵量向量。此外,這種處理之概念係揭示於第21圖。第21圖中,例如,查找表構成部38係從第4個第一時空區塊取得近傍特徵量之特徵量向量「α04=(p04-1,p04-2,p04-3,p04-4)」,從第15個第一時空區塊取得近傍特徵量之特徵量向量「α15=(p15-1,p15-2,p15-3,p15-4)」。 Next, the lookup table constructing unit 38 obtains the near feature quantity of each of the 16 first spatiotemporal blocks of the first image. Further, for example, the lookup table constructing unit 38 calculates a frequency component using a discrete fourier transform for each first spatiotemporal block, and obtains a power of each domain. The power of each of the fields is used as the feature quantity vector of the near feature quantity. Moreover, the concept of such processing is disclosed in Figure 21. In Fig. 21, for example, the lookup table constructing unit 38 obtains the feature quantity vector "α 04 = (p 04-1 , p 04-2 , p 04-3 ) of the near feature quantity from the fourth first space-time block. p 04-4 )", the feature quantity vector "α 15 =(p 15-1 , p 15-2 , p 15-3 , p 15-4 )" of the near feature feature is obtained from the 15th first space-time block. .

接著,查找表構成部38會計算為第一圖像整體之特徵量的整體特徵量。例如,查找表構成部38會計算局部求得之特徵量向量(近傍特徵量之向量)之每個成分的分散「A1=(V1,V2,V3,V4)」作為整體特徵量。此外,這種處理概念係揭示於第22圖。 Next, the lookup table configuration unit 38 calculates the overall feature amount of the feature amount of the entire first image. For example, the lookup table constructing unit 38 calculates the dispersion "A 1 = (V 1 , V 2 , V 3 , V 4 )" of each component of the locally obtained feature quantity vector (the vector of the near feature quantity) as an overall feature. the amount. Moreover, this processing concept is disclosed in Figure 22.

其次,查找表構成部38會將毎個各區域之整體特徵量和近傍特徵量相連結,以構成用以構成對應資訊之特徵量向量「(A1、α01)等」。此外,查找表構成部38會構成特徵量向量與過濾器係數相對應之對應資訊。 Next, the lookup table constructing unit 38 connects the overall feature quantity and the near feature quantity of each of the areas to form a feature quantity vector "(A 1 , α 01 ), etc." for constructing the corresponding information. Further, the lookup table constructing unit 38 constitutes correspondence information corresponding to the feature amount vector and the filter coefficient.

接著,查找表積存部39會將特徵量向量與過濾器係數相對應之16個對應資訊積存在儲存部101。 Next, the lookup table storage unit 39 accumulates 16 pieces of correspondence information corresponding to the feature amount vector and the filter coefficient in the storage unit 101.

對其他組的第一圖像和第二圖像進行以上之處理。然後,查找表取得裝置3會取得第23圖所示之查找表。第23圖之查找表具有多數個對應資訊。此外,在此處,對應資訊具有特徵量向量和過濾器係數。 The above processing is performed on the first image and the second image of the other groups. Then, the lookup table obtaining means 3 obtains the lookup table shown in Fig. 23. The lookup table of Figure 23 has a plurality of corresponding information. Further, here, the corresponding information has a feature amount vector and a filter coefficient.

依以上所述,本實施形態中,可自動取得可利用於產生依目的而調整腦負荷之圖像所需的查找表。 As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically obtain a lookup table that can be used to generate an image for adjusting the brain load depending on the purpose.

(實施形態5) (Embodiment 5)

本實施形態中,係就使用實施形態4所建立之查找表來取得依目的對所受理之圖像施以腦負荷調整之圖像的圖像處理裝置4加以說明。 In the present embodiment, an image processing apparatus 4 that obtains an image of a brain load adjustment on an image to be accepted according to the purpose using the lookup table created in the fourth embodiment will be described.

第24圖為本實施形態之圖像處理裝置4的方塊圖。圖像處理裝置4具備:儲存部101、圖像受理部104、分割部105、圖像解析部106、映射部107、合成部108、以及圖像輸出部109。 Fig. 24 is a block diagram showing the image processing apparatus 4 of the embodiment. The image processing device 4 includes a storage unit 101, an image receiving unit 104, a dividing unit 105, an image analyzing unit 106, a mapping unit 107, a synthesizing unit 108, and an image output unit 109.

現在,圖像處理裝置4之儲存部101儲存有第23圖所示之查找表。此外,查找表較佳為以特徵量向量作為關鍵(key)予以索引化。而且,查找表較佳為以特徵量向量作為關鍵而分類有對應資訊。 Now, the storage unit 101 of the image processing apparatus 4 stores the lookup table shown in Fig. 23. In addition, the lookup table is preferably indexed with a feature quantity vector as a key. Moreover, the lookup table preferably classifies the corresponding information with the feature quantity vector as a key.

同時,假設圖像受理部104已受理第25圖所示之圖像。此外,第25圖之圖像係為景深較淺的圖像。 At the same time, it is assumed that the image receiving unit 104 has accepted the image shown in FIG. In addition, the image of Fig. 25 is an image with a shallow depth of field.

其次,圖像解析部106會計算第25圖之圖像的整體特徵量(An)。此外,整體特徵量之計算方法係為與實施形態4所說明之處理相同的處理。 Next, the image analysis unit 106 calculates the overall feature amount (A n ) of the image of Fig. 25. Further, the calculation method of the overall feature amount is the same processing as that described in the fourth embodiment.

接著,圖像解析部106等會對第25圖之圖像的各畫素計算近傍特徵量(αn)。此處之近傍特徵量係計算該畫素之近傍16×16畫素區塊內的頻率成分,以取得各個帯域的冪次。此外,有關於這種處理,係為和實施形態4所說明之處理相同的處理。 Next, the image analysis unit 106 calculates the near feature quantity (α n ) for each pixel of the image of Fig. 25 . Here, the Kinki feature quantity is used to calculate the frequency components in the near 16×16 pixel block of the pixel to obtain the power of each field. Further, this processing is the same as the processing described in the fourth embodiment.

然後,圖像解析部106會對各畫素構成由整體特徵量和近傍特徵量合成後之特徵量向量(An,αn)。 Then, the image analysis unit 106 forms a feature amount vector (A n , α n ) obtained by combining the total feature quantity and the near feature quantity for each pixel.

其次,圖像解析部106會計算對應各畫素的特徵量向量(An,αn)和構成查找表的2個以上對應資訊所具有之2個以上特徵量向量的距離,並決定距離最近之特徵量向量「例如(Am,αm)」。 Next, the image analysis unit 106 calculates the distance between the feature quantity vector (A n , α n ) corresponding to each pixel and the two or more feature quantity vectors of the two or more pieces of corresponding information constituting the lookup table, and determines the closest distance. The feature quantity vector "for example, (A m , α m )".

然後,映射部107會按各畫素的每個取得與距離最近之特徵量向量成對的過濾器係數「例如Fm」。 Then, the mapping unit 107 acquires a filter coefficient "for example, F m " that is paired with the closest feature quantity vector for each pixel.

其次,映射部107會對輸入圖像之各畫素施加藉由所取得之過濾器係數而實現之轉換過濾器,以取得第二圖像(輸出圖像)之各畫素。 Next, the mapping unit 107 applies a conversion filter realized by the obtained filter coefficients to each pixel of the input image to acquire each pixel of the second image (output image).

接著,合成部108將所取得之各畫素作為輸入圖像之畫素位置的輸出畫素值來構成輸出圖像。然後,圖像輸出部109將所構成之輸出圖像輸出。以上處理之概念揭示於第26圖。 Next, the synthesizing unit 108 forms an output image by using the acquired pixels as the output pixel values of the pixel positions of the input image. Then, the image output unit 109 outputs the constructed output image. The concept of the above processing is disclosed in Figure 26.

如以上所述,若依本實施形態,可以輸出經適當調整腦負荷之圖像。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, an image in which the brain load is appropriately adjusted can be output.

此外,本實施形態中,用以構成查找表之特徵量向量的取得方法和圖像解析部106之特徵量向量的取得方法並不相同。用以構成查找表之特徵量向量的取得方法和圖像解析部106之特徵量向量的取得方法亦可相同。 Further, in the present embodiment, the method of acquiring the feature quantity vector constituting the lookup table and the method of acquiring the feature quantity vector of the image analysis unit 106 are not the same. The method of acquiring the feature quantity vector constituting the lookup table and the method of acquiring the feature quantity vector of the image analysis unit 106 may be the same.

(實施形態6) (Embodiment 6)

本實施形態中,係就使用查找表取得相對於所受理之圖像其腦負荷已依目的而調整之圖像的圖像處理裝置5加以說明。此外,本實施形態中,和實施形態1等之主要不同點在於所應用之限制條件係按照輸入圖像作動態變化方面。 In the present embodiment, an image processing apparatus 5 that acquires an image whose brain load has been adjusted in accordance with the accepted image using a lookup table will be described. Further, in the present embodiment, the main difference from the first embodiment and the like is that the applied restriction conditions are dynamically changed in accordance with the input image.

第27圖為本實施形態之圖像處理裝置5的方塊圖。 Fig. 27 is a block diagram showing the image processing apparatus 5 of the embodiment.

圖像處理裝置5具備:儲存部101、限制條件儲存部502、指示受理部503、圖像受理部104、分割部105、圖像解析部106、映射部507、合成部108、圖像輸出部109、以及限制條件變更部510。 The image processing device 5 includes a storage unit 101, a restriction condition storage unit 502, an instruction reception unit 503, an image reception unit 104, a division unit 105, an image analysis unit 106, a mapping unit 507, a synthesis unit 108, and an image output unit. 109. The restriction condition changing unit 510.

映射部507具備:例如輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072、判斷裝置1073、特徵量取得裝置5071、限制條件決定裝置5072、變更裝置5074、及輸出圖像取得裝置1075。 The mapping unit 507 includes, for example, an output image candidate acquiring device 1072, a determining device 1073, a feature amount acquiring device 5071, a restriction condition determining device 5072, a changing device 5074, and an output image obtaining device 1075.

限制條件儲存部502得以儲存2組對以上為由儲存條件識別資訊和限制條件所構成之組對的拘束資訊。此處的限制條件雖係以有關輸出圖像之條件為例來說明,但亦可為有關輸入圖像或對應資訊之條件。條件識別資訊為用以識別限制條件的資訊。條件識別資訊為例如特徵量向量。此外,構成向量之特徵量為例如輸入圖像之近傍空間活性值。所謂近傍空間活性值可有例如圖場上相同位置之畫素的時間差分值、傾斜(一次及二次空間微分值)、極小值及極大值(1位值)、n位值、動態範圍、空間差分值、畫素值分散、空間高頻率區域之冪次、時間活性值和空間活性值之比等各種值。還有,限制條件為適當的近傍空間活性值。此外,拘束資訊的例子揭示於第28圖。第28圖中,拘束資訊具有:為條件識別資訊的近傍空間活性值、和為限制條件的適當活性值。 The restriction condition storage unit 502 can store two sets of restriction information on the above-mentioned pair of storage condition identification information and restriction conditions. The limitation here is described by taking the condition of the output image as an example, but it may also be a condition regarding the input image or the corresponding information. Conditional identification information is information used to identify restrictions. The condition identification information is, for example, a feature amount vector. Further, the feature quantity of the constituent vector is, for example, the near-field spatial activity value of the input image. The near-temporal spatial activity value may have, for example, a time difference value of a pixel at the same position on the field, a tilt (primary and secondary spatial differential value), a minimum value and a maximum value (a 1-bit value), an n-bit value, a dynamic range, Various values such as spatial difference values, pixel value dispersion, power of high frequency regions in space, ratio of time activity value to spatial activity value. Also, the restriction is an appropriate near-field activity value. In addition, examples of restraint information are disclosed in Figure 28. In Fig. 28, the constraint information has: a near-spatial activity value which is a conditional identification information, and an appropriate activity value which is a restriction condition.

指示受理部503從使用者受理用以變更限制條件之指示。此外,指示為例如修正第28圖之拘束資訊的指示。再者,指示為例如將使用者從圖像接收之刺激量予以變更的指示。 The instruction accepting unit 503 accepts an instruction to change the restriction condition from the user. Further, the indication is, for example, an instruction to correct the restriction information of Fig. 28. Further, the instruction is, for example, an instruction to change the amount of stimulation received by the user from the image.

構成映射部507之特徵量取得裝置5071取得圖像受理部104所受理之圖像(輸入圖像)的特徵量向量。特徵量取得裝置5071亦可取得圖像受理部104所受理之全部圖像的特徵量向量,亦可取得構成圖像受理部104所受理之圖像的時空區塊之特徵量向量。 The feature amount acquisition device 5071 that constitutes the map unit 507 acquires the feature amount vector of the image (input image) accepted by the image accepting unit 104. The feature amount acquiring means 5071 can also acquire the feature amount vector of all the images accepted by the image accepting unit 104, and can acquire the feature amount vector of the spatiotemporal block constituting the image accepted by the image accepting unit 104.

限制條件決定裝置5072將特徵量取得裝置5071所取得之特徵量向量應用在限制條件儲存部502之拘束資訊,以選擇限制條件。更具體而言,限制條件決定裝置5072選擇與特徵量取得裝置5071所取得之特徵量向量距離最近的條件識別資訊(該條件識別資訊亦為特徵量向量之情 形),並從限制條件儲存部502取得與該選擇之條件識別資訊成對之限制條件。 The restriction condition determining means 5072 applies the feature amount vector acquired by the feature amount acquisition means 5071 to the restriction information of the restriction condition storage unit 502 to select a restriction condition. More specifically, the restriction condition determining means 5072 selects the condition identification information closest to the feature amount vector acquired by the feature amount obtaining means 5071 (the condition identification information is also the feature quantity vector) The restriction condition storage unit 502 acquires a restriction condition paired with the selected condition identification information.

在判斷裝置1073判斷為未滿足限制條件時,變更裝置5074會使用限制條件決定裝置5072所取得之限制條件,將第二圖像之全部或一部分加以變更。此外,判斷裝置1073判斷為不滿足限制條件時,變更裝置5074也可將查找表加以變更。而且,在判斷裝置1073判斷為不滿足限制條件時,變更裝置5074也可將判斷後所受理之輸入圖像、或判斷後所得之時空區塊、或判斷後所受理之輸入圖像的1個以上特徵量、或判斷後所得之時空區塊的1個以上特徵量加以變更。 When the judging means 1073 determines that the restriction condition is not satisfied, the changing means 5074 changes all or a part of the second image using the restriction condition acquired by the restriction condition determining means 5072. Further, when the judging means 1073 determines that the restriction condition is not satisfied, the changing means 5074 may change the lookup table. Further, when the judging means 1073 determines that the restriction condition is not satisfied, the changing means 5074 may change the input image accepted after the judgment, or the space-time block obtained after the judgment, or one of the input images accepted after the judgment. The above feature amount or one or more feature amounts of the space-time block obtained after the determination is changed.

限制條件變更部510根據指示受理部503所受理之指示變更拘束資訊。再者,限制條件變更部510亦可自動變更拘束資訊。亦即,限制條件變更部510亦可根據例如使用者屬性(年齡、性別、住址等)、於廣播重疊之資訊(包含於EPG之資訊等)、時刻、時區(time zone)、外部感測器資訊(例如視聽房間之明亮度、温度等),自動變更拘束資訊。而且,在這種情況,限制條件變更部510係預先保存有關於要如何按照使用者屬性等來變更拘束資訊的資訊(例如顯示使用者屬性和變更計算法之公式的對應表等)。又,使用外部感測器時,限制條件變更部510從未圖示之感測器取得資訊(房間之明亮度、温度等)。 The restriction condition changing unit 510 changes the restriction information based on the instruction accepted by the instruction accepting unit 503. Furthermore, the restriction condition changing unit 510 can also automatically change the restriction information. In other words, the restriction condition changing unit 510 may be based on, for example, user attributes (age, gender, address, etc.), information superimposed on the broadcast (information included in the EPG, etc.), time, time zone, external sensor Information (such as the brightness of the room, temperature, etc.), automatically change the binding information. In this case, the restriction condition changing unit 510 stores in advance information on how the restriction information is to be changed in accordance with the user attribute or the like (for example, a correspondence table in which the user attribute and the formula of the change calculation method are displayed). Moreover, when an external sensor is used, the restriction condition changing unit 510 acquires information (brightness, temperature, and the like of the room) from a sensor (not shown).

限制條件儲存部502雖以非揮發性儲存媒體為佳,但亦可用揮發性儲存媒體來實現。拘束資訊儲存在限制條件儲存部502之過程並非所問。例如,藉由儲存媒體儲存之拘束資訊可儲存在限制條件儲存部502,透過通訊線路等發送之拘束資訊亦可儲存在限制條件儲存部502,或者經由輸入裝置輸入之拘束資訊亦可儲存在限制條件儲存部502。 The restriction condition storage unit 502 is preferably a non-volatile storage medium, but may be realized by a volatile storage medium. The process of storing the restraint information in the restriction condition storage unit 502 is not a question. For example, the restriction information stored in the storage medium may be stored in the restriction storage unit 502, and the restriction information transmitted via the communication line or the like may be stored in the restriction storage unit 502, or the restriction information input via the input device may be stored in the restriction. Condition storage unit 502.

指示受理部503得用鍵盤等輸入裝置之裝置驅動器或選單畫面之控制軟體等來實現。 The instruction accepting unit 503 can be realized by a device driver of an input device such as a keyboard or a control software for a menu screen.

映射部507、限制條件變更部510、特徵量取得裝置5071、限制條件決定裝置5072、及變更裝置5074通常得由MPU或記憶體等來實現。映射部507等之處理程序通常係以軟體來實現,該軟體係儲存於ROM等儲存媒體。但,也可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The mapping unit 507, the restriction condition changing unit 510, the feature amount acquiring device 5071, the restriction condition determining device 5072, and the changing device 5074 are usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program of the mapping unit 507 or the like is usually implemented by software, and the soft system is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. However, it can also be implemented by hardware (dedicated circuit).

接著,使用第29圖的流程圖來說明有關圖像處理裝置5的動作。第29圖的流程圖中,係說明有關與第2圖之流程圖不同的步驟。 Next, the operation of the image processing apparatus 5 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. In the flowchart of Fig. 29, steps different from the flowchart of Fig. 2 will be described.

(步驟S2901)映射部507執行映射處理。關於映射處理,係使用第30圖的流程圖來說明。 (Step S2901) The mapping unit 507 performs mapping processing. The mapping process is explained using the flowchart of FIG.

(步驟S2902)指示受理部503判斷是否受理使用者之指示。若受理使用者的指示,則進到步驟S2903;若不受理使用者之指示,則回到步驟S201。 (Step S2902) The instruction accepting unit 503 determines whether or not the user's instruction is accepted. If the user's instruction is accepted, the process proceeds to step S2903. If the user's instruction is not accepted, the process returns to step S201.

(步驟S2903)限制條件變更部510根據指示受理部503所受理的指示,將拘束資訊進行變更。 (Step S2903) The restriction condition changing unit 510 changes the restriction information based on the instruction received by the instruction accepting unit 503.

此外,第29圖之流程圖中,係將輸入圖像進行分割,且按每個時空區塊進行處理。但,第29圖的流程圖中,亦可對輸入圖像整體進行處理。 Further, in the flowchart of Fig. 29, the input image is divided and processed for each spatiotemporal block. However, in the flowchart of Fig. 29, the entire input image can also be processed.

接著,使用第30圖的流程圖來說明有關步驟S2901的映射處理。第30圖的流程圖中,係就與第4圖的流程圖不同的步驟加以說明。 Next, the mapping process related to step S2901 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. In the flowchart of Fig. 30, steps different from the flowchart of Fig. 4 will be described.

(步驟S3001)構成映射部507的特徵量取得裝置5071係取得圖像受理部104所受理之圖像的特徵量向量。 (Step S3001) The feature amount acquiring means 5071 constituting the mapping unit 507 acquires the feature amount vector of the image accepted by the image accepting unit 104.

(步驟S3002)限制條件決定裝置5072將特徵量取得裝置5071所取得的特徵量向量應用於限制條件儲存部502的拘束資訊,以決定限制條件。有關這種限制條件決定處理,係使用第31圖的流程圖來說明。 (Step S3002) The restriction condition determining means 5072 applies the feature amount vector acquired by the feature amount acquisition means 5071 to the restriction information of the restriction condition storage unit 502 to determine the restriction condition. This restriction condition determination processing will be described using the flowchart of Fig. 31.

接著,使用第31圖的流程圖來說明有關步驟S3002之限制條件決定處理。 Next, the restriction condition determination processing in step S3002 will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

(步驟S3101)限制條件決定裝置5072將1代入計數器i。 (Step S3101) The restriction condition determining means 5072 substitutes 1 for the counter i.

(步驟S3102)限制條件決定裝置5072判斷第i個拘束資訊是否存在於限制條件儲存部502。若存在有第i個拘束資訊,則進到步驟S3103,若不存在,則到步驟S3106。 (Step S3102) The restriction condition determining means 5072 determines whether or not the i-th constraint information exists in the restriction condition storage unit 502. If there is an i-th constraint information, the process proceeds to step S3103, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3106.

(步驟S3103)限制條件決定裝置5072從限制條件儲存部502取得第i個拘束資訊所具有之條件識別資訊。 (Step S3103) The restriction condition determining means 5072 acquires the condition identification information of the i-th constraint information from the restriction condition storage unit 502.

(步驟S3104)限制條件決定裝置5072計算步驟S3001所取得之特徵量向量和第i個條件識別資訊的距離。然後,限制條件決定裝置5072將該距離和第i個條件識別資訊相對應地暫時積存在緩衝器。 (Step S3104) The restriction condition determining means 5072 calculates the distance between the feature amount vector acquired in step S3001 and the i-th condition identification information. Then, the restriction condition determining means 5072 temporarily stores the distance in the buffer corresponding to the i-th condition identification information.

(步驟S3105)限制條件決定裝置5072將計數器i遞增1,並返回步驟S3102。 (Step S3105) The restriction condition determining means 5072 increments the counter i by 1, and returns to step S3102.

(步驟S3106)限制條件決定裝置5072從限制條件儲存部502取得與和步驟S3001所取得之特徵量向量的距離達到最小之條件識別資訊成對的限制條件。返回到上位處理。 (Step S3106) The restriction condition determining means 5072 acquires, from the restriction condition storage unit 502, a restriction condition in which the condition identification information having the smallest distance from the feature amount vector acquired in step S3001 is paired. Return to the upper processing.

如以上所述,若依本實施形態,透過按照輸入圖像改變所使用之限制條件來構成符合該限制條件之輸出圖像,可以輸出極高品質的圖像。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, an output image conforming to the restriction condition can be configured by changing the restriction conditions used for the input image, and an extremely high quality image can be output.

此外,本實施形態中,限制條件決定裝置5072變更並取得依輸入圖像而使用之限制條件。然而,限制條件決定裝置5072亦可將依輸出圖像而使用之限制條件加以變更。而且,限制條件決定裝置5072亦可將依輸入圖像與輸出圖像而使用之限制條件加以變更。 Further, in the present embodiment, the restriction condition determining means 5072 changes and acquires the restriction condition used in accordance with the input image. However, the restriction condition determining means 5072 may also change the restriction conditions used in accordance with the output image. Further, the restriction condition determining means 5072 can also change the restriction conditions used depending on the input image and the output image.

再者,本實施形態中,分割部105將圖像受理部104所受理之圖像進行分割。然而,亦可不將圖像受理部104所受理之圖像進行分割。在此種情況下,圖像處理裝置5中就不需要分割部105。此種情形,在其他實施形態中也一樣適用。 Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the division unit 105 divides the image accepted by the image reception unit 104. However, the image accepted by the image receiving unit 104 may not be divided. In this case, the division unit 105 is not required in the image processing apparatus 5. In this case, the same applies to other embodiments.

(實施形態7) (Embodiment 7)

本實施形態中,係就使用查找表對所受理之圖像取得依目的而調整腦負荷之圖像的圖像處理裝置6加以說明。此外,本實施形態中,和實施形態1等之主要不同點係使所應用之查找表按照輸入圖像或輸出圖像作動態變化方面。 In the present embodiment, an image processing device 6 that acquires an image of a brain load depending on the purpose of the received image using a lookup table will be described. Further, in the present embodiment, the main difference from the first embodiment and the like is that the applied lookup table is dynamically changed in accordance with the input image or the output image.

第32圖係為本實施形態之圖像處理裝置6的方塊圖。 Figure 32 is a block diagram of the image processing device 6 of the present embodiment.

圖像處理裝置6具備:儲存部101、限制條件儲存部502、指示受理部603、圖像受理部104、分割部105、圖像解析部106、映射部607、合成部108、圖像輸出部109、以及LUT變更資訊變更部610。 The image processing device 6 includes a storage unit 101, a restriction condition storage unit 502, an instruction reception unit 603, an image reception unit 104, a division unit 105, an image analysis unit 106, a mapping unit 607, a synthesis unit 108, and an image output unit. 109. The LUT change information changing unit 610.

再者,映射部607具備例如輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072、判斷裝置1073、第一特徵量取得裝置6071、第二特徵量取得裝置6072、LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073、LUT決定裝置6074、變更裝置5074、以及輸出圖像取得裝置1075。 Further, the mapping unit 607 includes, for example, an output image candidate acquisition device 1072, a determination device 1073, a first feature amount acquisition device 6071, a second feature amount acquisition device 6072, an LUT change information storage device 6073, an LUT determination device 6074, and a change device. 5074 and an output image acquisition device 1075.

此處之儲存部101儲存有2個以上查找表(以下稱「LUT(Look Up Table)」。 Here, the storage unit 101 stores two or more lookup tables (hereinafter referred to as "LUT (Look Up Table)".

指示受理部603係從使用者接受將後述之LUT變更資訊進行變更所需之指示。指示為例如將使用者從圖像接受之刺激量予以變更之指示。 The instruction accepting unit 603 receives an instruction necessary to change the LUT change information to be described later from the user. The indication is, for example, an indication that the amount of stimulation received by the user from the image is changed.

構成映射部607之第一特徵量取得裝置6071取得圖像受理部104所受理之圖像的特徵量向量。第一特徵量取得裝置6071執行與上述之特徵量取得裝置5071相同的動作。此外,第一特徵量取得裝置6071取得之特徵量向量稱作第一特徵量向量。 The first feature amount acquisition means 6071 constituting the mapping unit 607 acquires the feature amount vector of the image accepted by the image accepting unit 104. The first feature amount acquisition means 6071 performs the same operation as the above-described feature amount acquisition means 5071. Further, the feature amount vector acquired by the first feature amount acquisition means 6071 is referred to as a first feature amount vector.

第二特徵量取得裝置6072取得輸出圖像取得裝置1075所取得之輸出圖像之特徵量向量。第二特徵量取得裝置6072取得資訊之來源和第一特徵量取得裝置6071雖不相同,但所執行之動作與第一特徵量取得裝置6071相同。此外,第一特徵量取得裝置6071所取得之1個以上特徵量、和第二特徵量取得裝置6072所取得之1個以上特徵量可以全部皆為相同的特徵量,亦可局部包含相同的特徵量,也可為全部皆為不同的特徵量。此外,第二特徵量取得裝置6072取得之特徵量向量稱作第二特徵量向量。 The second feature amount acquisition means 6072 acquires the feature amount vector of the output image obtained by the output image acquisition means 1075. The source of the acquired second feature amount obtaining means 6072 is different from the first feature amount obtaining means 6071, but the operation performed is the same as that of the first feature amount obtaining means 6071. Further, one or more feature amounts acquired by the first feature amount acquisition device 6071 and one or more feature amounts acquired by the second feature amount acquisition device 6072 may all be the same feature amount, or may partially include the same feature. The quantity can also be a different feature quantity for all. Further, the feature amount vector acquired by the second feature amount acquisition means 6072 is referred to as a second feature amount vector.

LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073中儲存有LUT變更資訊,該LUT變更資訊係為在取得輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072所輸出之圖像候補之際用以變更要利用之LUT的資訊。LUT變更資訊為例如使第一特徵量向量和用以識別查找表之種類識別符的組對。又,LUT變更資訊亦可為例如第二特徵量向量和種類識別符的組對。而且,LUT變更資訊亦可為例如第一特徵量向量與第二特徵量向量和種類識別符的組對。此外,LUT變更資訊為例如第一特徵量向量、與2個以上種類識別符、與對應於各種類識別符之2個以上比值的組對。同時,LUT變更資訊亦可為例如第二特徵量向量、與2個以上種類識別符、與對應於各種類識別符之2個以上比值的組對。又,LUT變更資訊亦可為例如第一特徵量向量、與第二特徵量向量、與2個以 上種類識別符、與對應於各種類識別符之2個以上比值的組對。此外,LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073通常儲存有2個以上LUT變更資訊。又,上述之所謂比值,係為將2個以上LUT混合以構成新LUT時對應各LUT之比值。 The LUT change information storage means 6073 stores LUT change information for changing the information of the LUT to be used when the image candidate output by the output image candidate acquisition means 1072 is acquired. The LUT change information is, for example, a pair of first feature amount vectors and a class identifier for identifying a lookup table. Further, the LUT change information may be, for example, a pair of the second feature amount vector and the category identifier. Moreover, the LUT change information may be, for example, a pair of the first feature amount vector and the second feature amount vector and the category identifier. Further, the LUT change information is, for example, a first feature amount vector, a pair of two or more types of identifiers, and a pair of two or more ratios corresponding to the various class identifiers. Meanwhile, the LUT change information may be, for example, a second feature amount vector, a pair of two or more types of identifiers, and a pair of two or more ratios corresponding to the various class identifiers. Moreover, the LUT change information may be, for example, a first feature quantity vector, a second feature quantity vector, and two The upper type identifier and the pair of two or more ratios corresponding to the various class identifiers. Further, the LUT change information storage device 6073 usually stores two or more LUT change information. Further, the above-described ratio is a ratio corresponding to each LUT when two or more LUTs are mixed to form a new LUT.

再者,儲存於LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073之LUT變更資訊管理表例揭示於第33圖。第33圖中,LUT變更資訊管理表具有複數個LUT變更資訊。LUT變更資訊具有「ID」「第一特徵量向量」「第二特徵量向量」「LUT」「比值」。「LUT」為種類識別符。「比值」係在構成新LUT時顯示各LUT之混合比的資訊。此外,「比」並不限於比例,只要是使用複數個LUT來構成新LUT所需之任何資訊皆可。用以構成新LUT之資訊,例如為以構成複數個LUT之要素作為參數之演算式等。所謂構成LUT之要素,係為例如過濾器之係數、或特徵量向量之要素。 Further, an example of the LUT change information management table stored in the LUT change information storage means 6073 is disclosed in FIG. In Fig. 33, the LUT change information management table has a plurality of LUT change information. The LUT change information has "ID", "first feature quantity vector", "second feature quantity vector", "LUT", "ratio". "LUT" is the type identifier. The "ratio" is information showing the mixture ratio of each LUT when forming a new LUT. In addition, the "ratio" is not limited to the ratio, as long as it is any information required to form a new LUT using a plurality of LUTs. The information for constituting the new LUT is, for example, a calculation formula in which elements constituting a plurality of LUTs are used as parameters. The elements constituting the LUT are, for example, elements of a filter or elements of a feature quantity vector.

LUT決定裝置6074係使用LUT變更資訊儲存裝6073之LUT變更資訊來決定輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072要利用之LUT。更具體而言,LUT決定裝置6074將第一特徵量向量、或第二特徵量向量、或第一特徵量向量及第二特徵量向量使用於LUT變更資訊,以決定輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072要利用的LUT。此外,LUT決定裝置6074亦可將第一特徵量向量、或第二特徵量向量、或第一特徵量向量及第二特徵量向量使用於LUT變更資訊,而構成LUT。 The LUT determining means 6074 determines the LUT to be used by the output image candidate obtaining means 1072 by using the LUT change information of the LUT change information storage unit 6073. More specifically, the LUT determining means 6074 uses the first feature amount vector, or the second feature amount vector, or the first feature amount vector and the second feature amount vector for the LUT change information to determine the output image candidate obtaining means 1072 The LUT to be utilized. Further, the LUT decision means 6074 may also use the first feature amount vector, or the second feature amount vector, or the first feature amount vector and the second feature amount vector for the LUT change information to constitute the LUT.

以下,就LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073中儲存有第33圖之LUT變更資訊管理表時之LUT決定裝置6074的動作加以說明。LUT決定裝置6074會計算第一特徵量取得裝置6071所取得之第一特徵量向量和LUT變更資訊管理表內各記錄之第一特徵量向量的距離。接著,LUT決定裝置6074會計算第二特徵量取得裝置6072所取得之第二特徵量向量、和LUT變更資訊管理表中各記錄之第二特徵量向量的距離。然後,LUT決定裝置6074會按LUT變更資訊管理表之各記錄的每個,來取得例如2個距離之和。其次,LUT決定裝置6074會決定2個距離之和為最小的記錄。接著,LUT決定裝置6074取得已決定之記錄所具有的「LUT」的屬性值、或已決定之記錄所具有之「LUT」的屬性值和「比值」的屬性值。已決定之記錄所具有之「LUT」的屬性值為一個種類識別符時,LUT決定裝置6074會將以該 種類識別符所識別之LUT決定作為輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072要利用之LUT。另一方面,已決定之記錄所具有之「LUT」的屬性值為2個以上種類識別符時,LUT決定裝置6074會取得2個以上各種類識別符和「比值」的屬性值(以下,也單純稱為比值)的配組,以符合比值的方式,將2個以上各種類識別符所識別的LUT混合,而構成新的LUT。 Hereinafter, the operation of the LUT determining means 6074 when the LUT change information management table of Fig. 33 is stored in the LUT change information storage means 6073 will be described. The LUT determining means 6074 calculates the distance between the first feature amount vector obtained by the first feature amount obtaining means 6071 and the first feature amount vector of each record in the LUT change information management table. Next, the LUT determining means 6074 calculates the distance between the second feature amount vector obtained by the second feature amount obtaining means 6072 and the second feature amount vector of each record in the LUT change information management table. Then, the LUT decision means 6074 changes each of the records of the information management table by the LUT to obtain, for example, the sum of the two distances. Next, the LUT decision means 6074 determines the record in which the sum of the two distances is the smallest. Next, the LUT determining means 6074 acquires the attribute value of the "LUT" included in the determined record, or the attribute value of the "LUT" attribute value and the "ratio" attribute value of the determined record. When the attribute value of the "LUT" of the determined record has a category identifier, the LUT decision means 6074 will use the The LUT identified by the type identifier determines the LUT to be used as the output image candidate acquisition means 1072. On the other hand, when the attribute value of the "LUT" of the determined record is two or more types of identifiers, the LUT determining means 6074 acquires two or more kinds of class identifiers and attribute values of "ratio" (hereinafter also The matching group simply referred to as the ratio, and the LUTs identified by the two or more kinds of class identifiers are mixed to form a new LUT in a manner consistent with the ratio.

LUT變更資訊變更部610則根據指示受理部603所受理之指示,將LUT變更資訊加以變更。同時,LUT變更資訊變更部610亦可自動地變更LUT變更資訊。亦即,LUT變更資訊變更部610會按照例如使用者屬性(年齡、性別、住所等)、於廣播重疊之資訊(包含於EPG之資訊等)、時刻、時區、外部感測器資訊(例如視聽房間之明亮度、温度等),自動地變更LUT變更資訊。此外,在此種情形中,LUT變更資訊變更部610預先保存有要以何種方式按照使用者屬性等來變更LUT變更資訊之資訊。又,使用外部感測器資訊時,限制條件變更部510會從未圖示之感測器取得資訊(房間之明亮度、温度等)。 The LUT change information changing unit 610 changes the LUT change information based on the instruction received by the instruction accepting unit 603. At the same time, the LUT change information changing unit 610 can also automatically change the LUT change information. That is, the LUT change information changing unit 610 may, for example, user attributes (age, gender, residence, etc.), information superimposed on the broadcast (information included in the EPG, etc.), time, time zone, external sensor information (eg, audiovisual) The brightness of the room, temperature, etc., automatically change the LUT change information. Further, in this case, the LUT change information changing unit 610 stores in advance information on how to change the LUT change information in accordance with the user attribute or the like. Moreover, when the external sensor information is used, the restriction condition changing unit 510 acquires information (brightness, temperature, and the like of the room) from a sensor (not shown).

指示受理部603得由鍵盤等輸入裝置的裝置驅動器或選單畫面之控制軟體等來實現。 The instruction accepting unit 603 can be realized by a device driver of an input device such as a keyboard or a control software for a menu screen.

映射部607、LUT變更資訊變更部610、第一特徵量取得裝置6071、第二特徵量取得裝置6072、及LUT決定裝置6074通常得由MPU或記憶體等來實現。映射部607等之處理程序通常係用軟體來實現,該軟體則儲存於ROM等儲存媒體。但,亦可用硬體(專用電路)來實現。 The mapping unit 607, the LUT change information changing unit 610, the first feature amount obtaining means 6071, the second feature amount obtaining means 6072, and the LUT determining means 6074 are usually realized by an MPU, a memory, or the like. The processing program such as the mapping unit 607 is usually implemented by software, and the software is stored in a storage medium such as a ROM. However, it can also be implemented by hardware (dedicated circuit).

LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073較佳為非揮發性儲存媒體,但亦可用揮發性儲存媒體來實現。LUT變更資訊儲存在LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073之過程並非所問。例如,亦可藉由儲存媒體使LUT變更資訊儲存在LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073、亦可使經由通訊線路等發送之LUT變更資訊儲存在LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073、或者亦可使經由輸入裝置輸入之LUT變更資訊儲存在LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073。 The LUT change information storage device 6073 is preferably a non-volatile storage medium, but can also be implemented with a volatile storage medium. The process of storing the LUT change information in the LUT change information storage device 6073 is not a question. For example, the LUT change information may be stored in the LUT change information storage device 6073 by the storage medium, or the LUT change information transmitted via the communication line or the like may be stored in the LUT change information storage device 6073, or may be input via the input device. The LUT change information is stored in the LUT change information storage means 6073.

接著,使用第34圖的流程圖來說明有關圖像處理裝置6的動作。第34圖的流程圖中,係就與第2圖的流程圖不同的步驟加以說明。 Next, the operation of the image processing apparatus 6 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. In the flowchart of Fig. 34, steps different from the flowchart of Fig. 2 will be described.

(步驟S3401)由映射部607進行映射處理。有關映射處理,係使用第35圖的流程圖來說明。 (Step S3401) The mapping process is performed by the mapping unit 607. The mapping process is explained using the flowchart of Fig. 35.

(步驟S3402)指示受理部603判斷是否受理使用者之指示。若受理使用者之指示,則進到步驟S3403;若不受理使用者的指示,則返回步驟S201。 (Step S3402) The instruction accepting unit 603 determines whether or not the user's instruction is accepted. If the user's instruction is accepted, the process proceeds to step S3403. If the user's instruction is not accepted, the process returns to step S201.

(步驟S3403)LUT變更資訊變更部610根據指示受理部503受理的指示來變更LUT變更資訊。 (Step S3403) The LUT change information changing unit 610 changes the LUT change information based on the instruction received by the instruction accepting unit 503.

接著,使用第35圖的流程圖來說明有關步驟S3401的映射處理。第35圖的流程圖中,係就與第4圖的流程圖不同的步驟加以說明。 Next, the mapping process related to step S3401 will be described using the flowchart of FIG. In the flowchart of Fig. 35, steps different from the flowchart of Fig. 4 will be described.

(步驟S3501)映射部607之第一特徵量取得裝置6071從圖像受理部104所受理之輸入圖像取得第一特徵量向量。 (Step S3501) The first feature amount acquisition means 6071 of the mapping unit 607 acquires the first feature amount vector from the input image accepted by the image accepting unit 104.

(步驟S3502)第二特徵量取得裝置6072從輸出圖像取得裝置1075所取得之輸出圖像取得第二特徵量向量。此外,此處作為第二特徵量向量取得來源之輸出圖像通常為剛剛輸出之輸出圖像。 (Step S3502) The second feature amount acquisition means 6072 acquires the second feature amount vector from the output image obtained by the output image acquisition means 1075. Further, the output image obtained as the source of the second feature amount vector here is usually the output image just output.

(步驟S3503)LUT決定裝置6074使用步驟S3501所取得之第一特徵量向量和步驟S3502所取得之第二特徵量向量來決定LUT。有關為這種處理之LUT決定處理,係使用第36圖的流程圖來說明。 (Step S3503) The LUT determining means 6074 determines the LUT using the first feature amount vector obtained in step S3501 and the second feature amount vector obtained in step S3502. The LUT decision processing for this processing is explained using the flowchart of Fig. 36.

其次,使用第36圖的流程圖來說明有關步驟S3503的LUT決定處理。 Next, the LUT decision processing relating to step S3503 will be described using the flowchart of Fig. 36.

(步驟S3601)LUT決定裝置6074將1代入計數器i。 (Step S3601) The LUT decision means 6074 substitutes 1 for the counter i.

(步驟S3602)LUT決定裝置6074判斷是否存在第i個LUT變更資訊。若第i個LUT變更資訊存在,則進到步驟S3603,若不存在,則到步驟S3607。 (Step S3602) The LUT determining means 6074 determines whether or not the i-th LUT change information exists. If the i-th LUT change information exists, the process proceeds to step S3603, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3607.

(步驟S3603)LUT決定裝置6074取得第i個LUT變更資訊所具有之第一特徵量向量。接著,LUT決定裝置6074計算所取得之第一特徵量向量和步驟S3501所取得之第一特徵量向量之間的距離(d1)。 (Step S3603) The LUT determining means 6074 acquires the first feature amount vector of the i-th LUT change information. Next, the LUT decision means 6074 calculates the distance (d1) between the acquired first feature amount vector and the first feature amount vector obtained in step S3501.

(步驟S3604)LUT決定裝置6074取得第i個LUT變更資訊所具有之第二特徵量向量。接著,LUT決定裝置6074計算所取得之第二特徵量向量和步驟S3502所取得之第二特徵量向量之間的距離(d2)。 (Step S3604) The LUT determining means 6074 acquires the second feature amount vector of the i-th LUT change information. Next, the LUT decision means 6074 calculates the distance (d2) between the acquired second feature amount vector and the second feature amount vector obtained in step S3502.

(步驟S3605)LUT決定裝置6074將步驟S3603計算之距離(d1)和步驟S3604計算之距離(d2)代入計算式,並執行該計算式。然後,LUT決定裝置6074取得第i個LUT變更資訊之成本(C)。之後,LUT決定裝置6074使該成本(C)和第i個LUT變更資訊對應,且至少暫時予以積存。此外,計算式係為以2個距離作為參數之計算式,以各距離作為參數之函數。此外,這種函數通常係為以各距離作為參數之増加函數。計算式為例如「C=a1×d1+(1-a1)×d2」。而且,a1為例如0.5、0.8等。 (Step S3605) The LUT decision means 6074 substitutes the distance (d1) calculated in the step S3603 and the distance (d2) calculated in the step S3604 into the calculation formula, and executes the calculation formula. Then, the LUT decision means 6074 obtains the cost (C) of the i-th LUT change information. Thereafter, the LUT decision means 6074 associates the cost (C) with the i-th LUT change information, and at least temporarily accumulates it. In addition, the calculation formula is a calculation formula using two distances as parameters, and each distance is used as a function of the parameter. In addition, this function is usually a function of adding each distance as a parameter. The calculation formula is, for example, "C = a1 × d1 + (1 - a1) × d2". Further, a1 is, for example, 0.5, 0.8, or the like.

(步驟S3606)LUT決定裝置6074將計數器i遞增1。回到步驟S3602。 (Step S3606) The LUT decision means 6074 increments the counter i by one. Going back to step S3602.

(步驟S3607)LUT決定裝置6074取得步驟S3605所計算之成本最小之LUT變更資訊所具有之1個以上種類識別符。 (Step S3607) The LUT determining means 6074 acquires one or more types of identifiers included in the LUT change information having the smallest cost calculated in step S3605.

(步驟S3608)LUT決定裝置6074判斷步驟S3607所取得之種類識別符是否為複數。若為複數,進到步驟S3609;若為1個,則到步驟S3611。 (Step S3608) The LUT determining means 6074 determines whether or not the type identifier acquired in step S3607 is a complex number. If it is a plural, it progresses to step S3609; if it is one, it goes to step S3611.

(步驟S3609)LUT決定裝置6074以和種類識別符相對應之方式從LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073取得成本最小之LUT變更資訊所具有之複數個比值。 (Step S3609) The LUT determining means 6074 obtains a plurality of ratios of the LUT change information having the smallest cost from the LUT change information storage means 6073 so as to correspond to the type identifier.

(步驟S3610)LUT決定裝置6074從儲存部101取得與複數個種類識別符對應的LUT。然後,LUT決定裝置6074按照步驟S3609所取得之比值將已取得之LUT混合,並產生新的LUT。這種新的LUT即為輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072要使用的LUT。 (Step S3610) The LUT determining means 6074 acquires the LUT corresponding to the plurality of type identifiers from the storage unit 101. Then, the LUT decision means 6074 mixes the acquired LUTs according to the ratio obtained in step S3609, and generates a new LUT. This new LUT is the LUT to be used by the output image candidate acquisition means 1072.

此外,所謂LUT之混合係為例如以下的處理。例如,構成LUT之對應資訊為特徵量向量和參數群(例如過濾器之係數的集合)。而且,複數個LUT則具有相同的特徵量向量。同時,LUT決定裝置6074會取得對應於相同特徵量向量之複數個LUT之參數群,將構成該參數群之各參數按照比值來混合。例如,LUT「A」之某對應資訊具有之特徵量向量為V1,參數群為(4,10,7,‧‧‧)。而且,LUT「B」之某對應資訊所具有之特徵量 向量為V1,參數群為(10,8,17,‧‧‧)。然後,對應於LUT「A」之比值為「a1」、對應於LUT「A」之比為「1-a1」。這種情形中,LUT決定裝置6074取得參數群(4×a1+10×(1-a1),10×a1+8×(1-a1),7×a1+17×(1-a1),‧‧‧)。對所有的對應資訊進行這種處理。 Further, the mixing of the LUT is, for example, the following processing. For example, the corresponding information constituting the LUT is a feature quantity vector and a parameter group (for example, a set of coefficients of a filter). Moreover, a plurality of LUTs have the same feature quantity vector. At the same time, the LUT decision means 6074 obtains a parameter group of a plurality of LUTs corresponding to the same feature quantity vector, and mixes the parameters constituting the parameter group by the ratio. For example, a corresponding information of the LUT "A" has a feature quantity vector of V1 and a parameter group of (4, 10, 7, ‧ ‧) Moreover, the feature quantity of a corresponding information of the LUT "B" The vector is V1 and the parameter group is (10,8,17,‧‧‧). Then, the ratio corresponding to the LUT "A" is "a1", and the ratio corresponding to the LUT "A" is "1-a1". In this case, the LUT decision means 6074 obtains the parameter group (4 × a1 + 10 × (1 - a1), 10 × a1 + 8 × (1 - a1), 7 × a1 + 17 × (1 - a1), ‧ ‧‧). This is done for all corresponding information.

(步驟S3611)LUT決定裝置6074從LUT變更資訊儲存裝置6073取得用成本最小之LUT變更資訊具有的種類識別符所識別的LUT。這種LUT係為輸出圖像候補取得裝置1072使用的LUT。 (Step S3611) The LUT determining means 6074 acquires the LUT identified by the type identifier of the LUT change information having the lowest cost from the LUT change information storage means 6073. Such an LUT is an LUT used by the output image candidate acquisition device 1072.

如以上所述,若依本實施形態,藉由按照輸入圖像、或輸出圖像、或輸入圖像及輸出圖像來改變所應用之查找表及構成輸出圖像,可以輸出品質極高的圖像。 As described above, according to the present embodiment, by changing the applied lookup table and the output image in accordance with the input image, the output image, or the input image and the output image, the output quality can be extremely high. image.

(實施形態8) (Embodiment 8)

本實施形態中係就圖像學習裝置7加以說明。圖像學習裝置7為查找表取得裝置3取得構成查找表所用之第一圖像與第二圖像的裝置。再者,此處之圖像學習裝置7主要用以提昇娛樂性之圖像處理裝置的查找表所需之裝置。 In the present embodiment, the image learning device 7 will be described. The image learning device 7 is a device for the lookup table acquisition device 3 to acquire the first image and the second image used for the lookup table. Furthermore, the image learning device 7 herein is mainly used to enhance the look-up table of the entertainment image processing device.

第37圖為圖像學習裝置7的方塊圖。圖像學習裝置7具有:第一圖像儲存部31、第二圖像儲存部32、圖像產生部71、以及圖像積存部72。此外,第一圖像儲存部31及第二圖像儲存部32係構成查找表取得裝置3等的裝置。 Figure 37 is a block diagram of the image learning device 7. The image learning device 7 includes a first image storage unit 31, a second image storage unit 32, an image generation unit 71, and an image storage unit 72. Further, the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32 constitute means for the lookup table acquisition device 3 and the like.

第一圖像儲存部31得儲存1個以上第一圖像。第一圖像儲存部31亦可儲存為動畫之第一圖像。 The first image storage unit 31 may store one or more first images. The first image storage unit 31 can also be stored as the first image of the animation.

第二圖像儲存部32得儲存1個以上第二圖像。第二圖像儲存部32亦可儲存為動畫之第二圖像。 The second image storage unit 32 has to store one or more second images. The second image storage unit 32 can also be stored as a second image of the animation.

圖像產生部71從儲存於第一圖像儲存部31之第一圖像來產生第二圖像。同時,圖像產生部71亦可從儲存於第二圖像儲存部32之第二圖像來產生第一圖像。 The image generation unit 71 generates a second image from the first image stored in the first image storage unit 31. At the same time, the image generating unit 71 can also generate the first image from the second image stored in the second image storage unit 32.

例如,圖像產生部71產生以下之第二圖像、或第一圖像。 For example, the image generation unit 71 generates the following second image or first image.

(1)插入有為白圖像之閃亮圖像的第二圖像的產生。 (1) Generation of a second image in which a shiny image of a white image is inserted.

圖像產生部71從第一圖像儲存部31讀取為動畫之第一圖像。接著,圖像產生部71將白圖像之圖框插入第一圖像之任意圖框位置,並取得第二圖像。 The image generating unit 71 reads the first image as an animation from the first image storage unit 31. Next, the image generating unit 71 inserts the frame of the white image into an arbitrary frame position of the first image, and acquires the second image.

(2)插入有為圖像已提高亮度值之閃亮圖像的第二圖像的產生。 (2) The generation of a second image in which a shiny image whose image has been increased in brightness value is inserted.

圖像產生部71從第一圖像儲存部31讀取為動畫之第一圖像。接著,圖像產生部71將第一圖像之任意圖框位置的圖框亮度值提高,並取得第二圖像。 The image generating unit 71 reads the first image as an animation from the first image storage unit 31. Next, the image generation unit 71 increases the frame luminance value of an arbitrary frame position of the first image, and acquires the second image.

(3)插入有為高對比圖像之閃亮圖像的第二圖像的產生 (3) Generation of a second image inserted with a shiny image for a high contrast image

圖像產生部71從第一圖像儲存部31讀取為動畫之第一圖像。接著,圖像產生部71將高對比圖像插入第一圖像之任意圖框位置,並取得第二圖像。 The image generating unit 71 reads the first image as an animation from the first image storage unit 31. Next, the image generating unit 71 inserts the high contrast image into an arbitrary frame position of the first image and acquires the second image.

(4)圖像強調不均一畫面之第二圖像的產生 (4) The image emphasizes the generation of the second image of the uneven picture

圖像產生部71從第一圖像儲存部31讀取為動畫之第一圖像。接著,圖像產生部71對於第一圖像之任意位置的圖框施以邊緣強化(edge enhancement)或對比變更等,而取得第二圖像。邊緣強化或對比變更等處理係屬公知技術,其說明容予省略。 The image generating unit 71 reads the first image as an animation from the first image storage unit 31. Next, the image generation unit 71 obtains a second image by applying edge enhancement, contrast change, or the like to the frame at an arbitrary position of the first image. Processing such as edge enhancement or contrast change is a well-known technique, and the description thereof is omitted.

(5)薄膜狀(film like)影像之處理 (5) Processing of film like images

圖像產生部71從第二圖像儲存部32讀取作為成膜源(film source)之動畫式第二圖像。接著,將第二圖像作圖像轉換,並取得第一圖像。 The image generating unit 71 reads an animated second image as a film source from the second image storage unit 32. Next, the second image is image-converted and the first image is obtained.

圖像積存部72將圖像產生部71所產生之第二圖像積存於第二圖像儲存部32。同時,圖像積存部72將圖像產生部71所產生之第一圖像積存於第一圖像儲存部31。 The image storage unit 72 accumulates the second image generated by the image generation unit 71 in the second image storage unit 32. At the same time, the image storage unit 72 stores the first image generated by the image generating unit 71 in the first image storage unit 31.

其次,就圖像處理裝置之映射處理加以說明。映射處理係由上述之圖像處理裝置的映射部來執行。 Next, the mapping processing of the image processing apparatus will be described. The mapping process is performed by the mapping section of the image processing apparatus described above.

第二圖像為上述(1)至(3)之任一情況所產生之閃亮圖像時,映射部107使用輸入圖像之特徵量向量(例如,以亮度分布或全畫面移動量等為要素而產生之向量),從LUT取得和該特徵量向量對應之對應資訊。然後, 映射部107使用所取得之對應資訊將特殊圖框插入。此外,輸入圖像之特徵量向量由圖像解析部106取得。而且,輸入圖像之特徵量向量滿足預定條件(亦可為對應資訊)時,映射部107也可插入特殊圖框。所謂特殊圖框係指閃亮圖像之圖框。 When the second image is a blinking image generated by any of the above (1) to (3), the mapping unit 107 uses the feature amount vector of the input image (for example, the luminance distribution or the total screen shift amount, etc.) The vector generated by the element) obtains the corresponding information corresponding to the feature quantity vector from the LUT. then, The mapping unit 107 inserts the special frame using the acquired corresponding information. Further, the feature amount vector of the input image is acquired by the image analysis unit 106. Further, when the feature amount vector of the input image satisfies a predetermined condition (which may also be corresponding information), the mapping unit 107 may insert a special frame. The so-called special frame refers to the frame of the shiny image.

此外,第二圖像為上述(4)所產生之強調不均一圖像時,映射部107可藉由進行上述處理,以強調方法非全畫面皆為一律的方式,例如按照波形而自動選擇不同的強調方法。 Further, when the second image is the emphasized unevenness image generated by the above (4), the mapping unit 107 can perform the above-described processing to emphasize that the non-full screen is uniform, for example, automatically select different according to the waveform. Emphasis on the method.

再者,第二圖像為上述(5)所產生之薄膜狀圖像時,映射部107可藉由進行上述之處理,而輸出已轉換成薄膜狀圖像的輸出圖像。 Further, when the second image is the film-shaped image generated in the above (5), the mapping unit 107 can output an output image converted into a film-like image by performing the above-described processing.

此外,亦可將例如在不同照明環境下拍攝相同拍攝對象所得之第一圖像與第二圖像分別積存於第一圖像儲存部31與第二圖像儲存部32。所謂不同照明環境,如上所述,係例如依拍攝對象而使照明之明亮度不同的環境。而且,所謂不同照明環境,係例如光源位置錯開的環境。 Further, for example, the first image and the second image obtained by capturing the same subject in different illumination environments may be stored in the first image storage unit 31 and the second image storage unit 32, respectively. As described above, the different lighting environments are, for example, environments in which the brightness of illumination is different depending on the subject. Moreover, the so-called different lighting environments are, for example, environments in which the positions of the light sources are staggered.

在這種情形中,映射部107可藉由進行上述之處理,而提昇圖像之質感、或獲得表面反射特性完全不同之圖像。例如,輸入圖像中新製作的弦樂器卻以漆色古樸之弦樂器形態輸出。 In this case, the mapping unit 107 can enhance the texture of the image or obtain an image in which the surface reflection characteristics are completely different by performing the above-described processing. For example, the newly created stringed instrument in the input image is output in the form of a lacquered string instrument.

再者,第38圖係顯示執行本說明書所述之程式來實現上述實施形態之查找表取得裝置等之電腦的外觀。上述之實施形態得以電腦硬體及在其中執行之電腦程式來實現。第38圖為該電腦系統340的概觀圖,第39圖為電腦系統340的方塊圖。 Further, Fig. 38 shows an appearance of a computer which executes the program described in the present specification to realize the lookup table acquisition device and the like of the above embodiment. The above embodiments are implemented by a computer hardware and a computer program executed therein. 38 is an overview of the computer system 340, and FIG. 39 is a block diagram of the computer system 340.

第38圖中,電腦系統340包含FE驅動器、包括CD-ROM驅動器之電腦341、鍵盤342、滑鼠343、以及顯示器344。 In Fig. 38, computer system 340 includes an FE driver, a computer 341 including a CD-ROM drive, a keyboard 342, a mouse 343, and a display 344.

第39圖中,電腦341除了FE驅動器3411、CD-ROM驅動器3412外,還包含MPU3413、連接於CD-ROM驅動器3412及FD驅動器3411之匯流排3414、用以儲存啟動程式等程式之ROM3415、暫時儲存應用程式之命令同時提供暫時儲存空間之RAM3416、及用以儲存應用程式、系統程式和資料之硬碟3417。此處雖未加以圖示,唯電腦341亦可再包含提供與LAN連接的網路卡。 In Fig. 39, the computer 341 includes, in addition to the FE driver 3411 and the CD-ROM drive 3412, an MPU 3413, a busbar 3414 connected to the CD-ROM drive 3412 and the FD driver 3411, and a ROM 3415 for storing a program such as a boot program. The command to store the application also provides temporary storage space for the RAM 3416 and a hard drive 3417 for storing applications, system programs and data. Although not shown here, only the computer 341 can further include a network card that provides connection to the LAN.

使電腦系統340執行上述實施形態之查找表取得裝置等功能之程式,亦可儲存於CD-ROM3501、或FD3502,再插入CD-ROM驅動器3412或FD驅動器3411,然後傳送到硬碟3417。該程式也可經由未圖示之網路傳送到電腦341,並儲存在硬碟3417,以取代前述方式。程式在執行時係載入於RAM3416。亦可直接從CD-ROM3501、FD3502或網路載入程式。 The program for causing the computer system 340 to execute the functions such as the lookup table acquisition means of the above-described embodiment may be stored in the CD-ROM 3501 or FD3502, inserted into the CD-ROM drive 3412 or the FD drive 3411, and then transferred to the hard disk 3417. The program can also be transferred to the computer 341 via a network (not shown) and stored on the hard disk 3417 instead of the foregoing. The program is loaded into RAM3416 during execution. You can also load programs directly from the CD-ROM 3501, FD3502 or the Internet.

程式亦可不一定要包含使電腦341執行上述實施形態之查找表取得裝置等功能之作業系統(OS)、或第三方(third party)程式等。程式也可僅包含以控制之態様叫出適當功能(模組),以得到所期望之結果的命令部分。電腦系統340以何種方式動作已為眾所周知,其詳細說明容予省略。 The program does not necessarily include an operating system (OS) or a third party program that causes the computer 341 to execute functions such as the lookup table acquisition device of the above-described embodiment. The program may also include only the portion of the command that sings out the appropriate function (module) in a controlled state to obtain the desired result. It is well known in what manner the computer system 340 operates, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

此外,執行上述程式之電腦可為單數、亦可為複數。換言之,可進行集中處理,或者也可進行分散處理。 In addition, the computer that executes the above program may be singular or plural. In other words, centralized processing can be performed, or distributed processing can also be performed.

此外,上述各實施形態中,各處理(各功能)可經由單一裝置(系統)實施集中處理來實現,或者,也可經由複數裝置實施分散處理來實現。 Further, in each of the above embodiments, each process (each function) may be implemented by performing centralized processing via a single device (system), or may be implemented by performing distributed processing via a plurality of devices.

本發明並非限定在以上的實施形態,而是可作各種變更,這些變更亦應包含在本發明範圍內,應無庸贅言。 The present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the scope of the invention.

[產業上之可利用性] [Industrial availability]

如以上所述,本發明之圖像處理裝置具有可輸出經調整腦負荷之圖像的功效,以作為電視接收機等而言,甚為實用。 As described above, the image processing apparatus of the present invention has an effect of outputting an image with an adjusted brain load, and is practical as a television receiver or the like.

1‧‧‧圖像處理裝置 1‧‧‧Image processing device

101‧‧‧儲存部 101‧‧‧ Storage Department

102‧‧‧限制條件儲存部 102‧‧‧Restricted Condition Storage Department

103‧‧‧指示受理部 103‧‧‧Directed Reception Department

104‧‧‧圖像受理部 104‧‧‧Image Reception Department

105‧‧‧分割部 105‧‧‧ Division

106‧‧‧圖像解析部 106‧‧‧Image Analysis Department

107‧‧‧映射部 107‧‧‧ Mapping Department

108‧‧‧合成部 108‧‧‧Combination Department

109‧‧‧圖像輸出部 109‧‧‧Image Output Department

110‧‧‧查找表更新部 110‧‧‧ Lookup Table Update Department

1071‧‧‧種類識別符取得裝置 1071‧‧‧Type identifier acquisition device

1072‧‧‧輸出圖像候補取得裝置 1072‧‧‧ Output image candidate acquisition device

1073‧‧‧判斷裝置 1073‧‧‧Judgement device

1074‧‧‧變更裝置 1074‧‧‧Change device

1075‧‧‧輸出圖像取得裝置 1075‧‧‧ Output image acquisition device

Claims (14)

一種圖像處理裝置,具備:儲存部,其儲存具有1個或2個以上對應資訊的查找表,該對應資訊為用以取得1個或2個以上之第一圖像的全部或一部分與第二圖像之全部或一部分相對應的資訊,而該第二圖像係為與第一圖像相同對象的圖像;圖像受理部,受理1個或2個以上圖像;映射部,使用該1個或2個以上對應資訊中的任一對應資訊,來取得與該圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像的全部或一部分相對應之1個或2個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分;以及圖像輸出部,輸出該映射部所取得之1個以上第二圖像的全部、或為該映射部所取得之1個以上第二圖像之一部分之集合的1個以上輸出圖像,其中,該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像具有以下關係:該第二圖像為與得到該第一圖像之環境不同的另一環境所得之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為局部插入有閃亮畫面之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為將該第一圖像變形後之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為對描寫該第一圖像的繪畫進行拍攝後所得之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為該第一圖像之CG圖像;該另一環境為照明或光源之光量比該環境多的環境,或者該另一環境為與該環境相比較該另一環境的光源位置能夠清楚表現出圖像上之物件影子的環境,或者該另一環境為與該環境相比較該另一環境的光源位置能夠清楚表現出圖像上之物件立體感的環境,或者該另一環境為與該環境相比較該另一環境的攝影機位置能夠清楚表現出圖像上之物件立體感的環境,或者該另一環境為照明顏色與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為天候與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為温度或者濕度與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為景深與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為快門速度與該環境不同的環境。 An image processing apparatus includes: a storage unit that stores a lookup table having one or two or more pieces of corresponding information, wherein the corresponding information is used to acquire all or part of one or two or more first images and The information corresponding to all or a part of the two images, and the second image is an image of the same object as the first image; the image receiving unit accepts one or two or more images; and the mapping unit uses One or two or more second images corresponding to all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit are acquired by any one of the one or two or more pieces of correspondence information And all or a part of the image output unit outputs one or more of the one or more second images acquired by the mapping unit or one or more of the one or more second images acquired by the mapping unit Outputting an image, wherein the second image has a relationship with respect to the first image: the second image is an image obtained by another environment different from an environment in which the first image is obtained; or the first image a second image relative to the first image, the second image being a bureau Inserting an image with a shiny image; or the second image is an image that deforms the first image relative to the first image; or the second image is relative to the image a first image, the second image being an image obtained by photographing a drawing depicting the first image; or the second image being the first image relative to the first image a CG image of an image; the other environment is an environment in which the amount of light of the illumination or light source is greater than the environment, or the other environment is a position of the light source of the other environment that is clearly displayed on the image compared to the environment The environment in which the object is shadowed, or the other environment is an environment in which the position of the light source of the other environment is clearly comparable to the environment, or the environment of the object on the image is clearly perceived, or the other environment is compared to the environment The camera position of another environment can clearly show the environment of the three-dimensionality of the object on the image, or the other environment is an environment in which the illumination color is different from the environment, or the other environment is an environment different from the environment, or The other environment is temperature or Different humidity environment and the environment, or the environment for further depth to the different environments of the environment or other environment for the shutter speed and the environment different. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之圖像處理裝置,其中,該查找表具有2個以上的對應資訊,且具備用以決定與圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應的第一圖像之全部或一部分的圖像解析部;該映射部則使用與圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊,來取得與該圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的第二圖像。 The image processing device according to claim 1, wherein the lookup table has two or more pieces of corresponding information, and is provided with all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit. An image analysis unit of all or a part of the corresponding first image; the mapping unit acquires the image using the corresponding information corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit A second image corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the analysis unit. 如申請專利範圍第2項所述之圖像處理裝置,其中,該第一圖像之全部或一部分為所輸入影像中之一部分的第一時空區塊;該第二圖像之全部或一部分為輸出到畫面之影像中之一部分的第二時空區塊;該圖像受理部受理為1個以上圖像之集合的影像;且具備分割部,用以將該圖像受理部所受理之影像在空間性、或時間性、或空間性及時間性上分割成2個以上,而取得2個以上第一時空區塊;該圖像解析部按該分割部所取得之2個以上各第一時空區塊的每個,來決定和各第一時空區塊相對應之第一圖像的全部或一部分;該映射部按每個該2個以上各第一時空區塊,使用與該圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的對應資訊,來取得與該圖像解析部所決定之第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的第二時空區塊;又具備合成部,用以將該映射部所取得之2個以上各第二時空區塊配置在與該2個以上各第二時空區塊相對應之第一時空區塊的時間性、或空間性、或空間性及時間性位置,並產生輸出圖像;該圖像輸出部則將該合成部所產生之輸出圖像予以輸出。 The image processing device of claim 2, wherein all or a portion of the first image is a first space-time block of a portion of the input image; all or a portion of the second image is a second space-time block that is output to one of the images of the screen; the image receiving unit receives an image of a set of one or more images; and includes a dividing unit for receiving an image received by the image receiving unit Spatially or temporally, or spatially and temporally, the two spatial and temporal blocks are divided into two or more, and two or more first space-time blocks are obtained. The image analysis unit selects two or more first time and space according to the divided portion. Each of the blocks determines all or a part of the first image corresponding to each of the first spatiotemporal blocks; the mapping unit uses and parses the image for each of the two or more first spatiotemporal blocks a second time-space block corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the image analysis unit, corresponding to all or a part of the first image determined by the unit, and a synthesis unit For the 2 obtained by the mapping unit Each of the second time and space blocks is disposed in a temporal, or spatial, or spatial and temporal position of the first space-time block corresponding to the two or more second space-time blocks, and generates an output image The image output unit outputs the output image generated by the combining unit. 如申請專利範圍第2項所述之圖像處理裝置,其中,該圖像解析部將該圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像、或該分割部所取得之2個以上各第一時空區塊予以解析,以取得1個以上的特徵量,並決定與1個以上特徵量相對應之第一圖像之全部或一部分。 The image processing device according to the second aspect of the invention, wherein the image analysis unit acquires one or more images received by the image receiving unit or two or more of the first ones obtained by the dividing unit. The space-time block is analyzed to obtain one or more feature quantities, and all or a part of the first image corresponding to one or more feature quantities is determined. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之圖像處理裝置,其中,該對應資訊為具有:有關在一個環境所得之一個對象的第一圖像之全部或一部分的1個以上特徵量;及用以產生與該第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應之第二圖像之全部或一部分的演算式、或代入演算式之參數之集合的資訊。 The image processing device of claim 1, wherein the corresponding information has one or more feature quantities relating to all or a part of the first image of one object obtained in one environment; Generating a formula of all or a portion of the second image corresponding to all or a portion of the first image, or a set of parameters substituted into the formula. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之圖像處理裝置,其中,該儲存部儲存有2組對以上用以識別查找表種類的種類識別符和與種類識別符相對應之查找表的組對;該映射部具備:種類識別符取得裝置,其取得用以識別所要利用之查找表之種類識別符;以及輸出圖像取得裝置,其使用與該種類識別符相對應之查找表所具有之對應資訊中之任一對應資訊,來取得與該圖像受理部所受理之圖像之全部或一部分相對應的第二圖像之全部或一部分,作為輸出圖像之全部或一部分。 The image processing device according to claim 1, wherein the storage unit stores two sets of pairs of the above-mentioned type identifier for identifying the type of the lookup table and the lookup table corresponding to the type identifier; The mapping unit includes: a type identifier acquiring device that acquires a type identifier for identifying a lookup table to be used; and an output image obtaining device that uses a corresponding information of the lookup table corresponding to the type identifier All or a part of the second image corresponding to all or a part of the image accepted by the image receiving unit is obtained as any or part of the output image. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之圖像處理裝置,其中,又具備:指示受理部,用以受理使用者的指示;以及查找表更新部,按照該指示將該查找表所具有的2個以上對應資訊之任一個加以變更。 The image processing device according to claim 1, further comprising: an instruction accepting unit that receives an instruction from a user; and a lookup table update unit that has two of the lookup tables in accordance with the instruction Any of the above information is changed. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之圖像處理裝置,其中,又具備限制條件儲存部,其儲存為輸入圖像、對應資訊、或輸出圖像中1種以上資訊所應滿足之條件的限制條件;該映射部使用前述1個或2個以上對應資訊中之任一對應資訊,以符合該限制條件的方式,來取得與該圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應之1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分。 The image processing device according to claim 1, further comprising a restriction condition storage unit that stores a limit of a condition that the input image, the corresponding information, or the output image has one or more types of information to satisfy Condition: the mapping unit acquires all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit so as to satisfy the restriction condition by using one of the one or more pieces of correspondence information All or part of one or more second images corresponding to each other. 如申請專利範圍第1項所述之圖像處理裝置,其中,儲存於該儲存部之查找表係為藉由查找表取得裝置所取得之查找表,該查找表取得裝置具備:第一圖像儲存部,其儲存1個以上第一圖像; 第二圖像儲存部,其儲存與該1個以上各第一圖像相對應的1個以上各第二圖像,該第二圖像相較於該第一圖像,係為其腦負荷經調整且與該1個以上各第一圖像相同對象之圖像;第一圖像相關資訊取得部,其從該1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分取得為有關儲存於該第一圖像儲存部的1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分之資訊的1個以上第一圖像相關資訊;第二圖像相關資訊取得部,其從該1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分取得為有關儲存於該第二圖像儲存部的1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分之資訊的1個以上第二圖像相關資訊;以及查找表構成部,用以構成具有1個或2個以上對應資訊之查找表,該對應資訊具有:該第一圖像相關資訊取得部所取得之第一圖像相關資訊、及為該第二圖像相關資訊取得部所取得且與該第一圖像相關資訊相對應之第二圖像相關資訊,且該對應資訊係為顯示該1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分與該1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分相對應的資訊。 The image processing device of claim 1, wherein the lookup table stored in the storage unit is a lookup table obtained by a lookup table obtaining device, the lookup table obtaining device having: a first image a storage unit that stores more than one first image; a second image storage unit that stores one or more second images corresponding to the one or more first images, wherein the second image is a brain load compared to the first image An image that is adjusted to be the same object as the one or more first images; and the first image related information acquisition unit acquires all or part of the one or more first images for storage in the first One or more first image related information of all or a part of the information of one or more first images in the image storage unit; and the second image related information acquiring unit from all of the one or more second images Or a part of the second image related information obtained as information on all or a part of the one or more second images stored in the second image storage unit; and a lookup table forming unit configured to have 1 a lookup table of two or more corresponding information, the corresponding information having: the first image related information obtained by the first image related information acquiring unit, and acquired by the second image related information acquiring unit Corresponding to the second image related information of the first image related information And the correspondence information to display all of the first lines of the image over a whole or a part of the one or more second images of a portion corresponding to the information. 如申請專利範圍第9項所述之圖像處理裝置,其中,該對應資訊包含:為有關該1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分之資訊的第一圖像相關資訊、及為有關該1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分且與該第一圖像相關資訊相對應之資訊的第二圖像相關資訊;該查找表取得裝置又具備:第一圖像相關資訊取得部,其從該1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分取得為有關儲存於該第一圖像儲存部的1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分之資訊的1個以上第一圖像相關資訊;第二圖像相關資訊取得部,其從該1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分取得為有關儲存於該第二圖像儲存部的1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分之資訊的1個以上第二圖像相關資訊;構成該查找表取得裝置之該查找表構成部係構成具有1個或2個以上對應資訊之查找表,該對應資訊具有:該第一圖像相關資訊取得部所取得之第一圖像相關資訊、及為該第二圖像相關資訊取得部所取得且與該第一圖像相關資訊相對應之資訊的第二圖像相關資訊,且該對應資訊係為顯示該1 個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分與該1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分相對應的資訊。 The image processing device of claim 9, wherein the corresponding information includes: first image related information relating to all or a part of the information of the one or more first images, and is related to Second image related information of all or a part of the first image and the information corresponding to the first image related information; the lookup table obtaining device further includes: a first image related information obtaining unit, Acquiring one or more pieces of first image related information relating to information of all or a part of one or more first images stored in the first image storage unit from all or part of the one or more first images; The second image related information acquisition unit acquires information on all or a part of one or more second images stored in the second image storage unit from all or part of the one or more second images. One or more second image related information; the lookup table forming unit constituting the lookup table obtaining means constitutes a lookup table having one or two or more corresponding information, the corresponding information having: the first image related information obtained Ministry Corresponding to the first image related information and the second image related information of the information obtained by the second image related information obtaining unit and corresponding to the first image related information, and the corresponding information is displayed The 1 Information corresponding to all or a portion of the first or more first images and all or a portion of the one or more second images. 如申請專利範圍第9項所述之圖像處理裝置,其中,該對應資訊具有:與該1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分相對應的特徵量向量、及將該1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分轉換成該1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分之圖像轉換過濾器;構成該查找表取得裝置之該查找表構成部係構成具有1個或2個以上對應資訊的查找表;該對應資訊係從該1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分取得特徵量向量,並取得將該1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分轉換為該1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分的轉換過濾器,且具有該特徵量向量與該轉換過濾器。 The image processing device according to claim 9, wherein the correspondence information includes: a feature amount vector corresponding to all or a part of the one or more first images, and the first one or more An image conversion filter that converts all or part of the image into all or part of the one or more second images; and the lookup table configuration unit constituting the lookup table acquisition device has one or two or more corresponding information The matching table obtains the feature quantity vector from all or part of the one or more first images, and acquires all or a part of the one or more first images into the one or more second images. A conversion filter like all or part of it, and having the feature quantity vector and the conversion filter. 如申請專利範圍第9項所述之圖像處理裝置,其中,該查找表取得裝置又具備:第二圖像資訊候補集合儲存部,其儲存與1個以上各第一圖像相對應的1個以上第二圖像資訊候補集合,該第二圖像資訊候補集合係為有關第二圖像之資訊的2個以上第二圖像資訊之候補的集合;候補輸出部,輸出該1個以上第二圖像資訊候補集合;指示受理部,用以受理從該候補輸出部所輸出之1個以上各第二圖像資訊候補集合所具有的2個以上第二圖像資訊之候補中選擇1個以上第二圖像資訊之候補的指示;以及第二圖像積存部,使用與該指示受理部所受理之指示相對應的1個以上第二圖像資訊之候補來取得1個以上第二圖像,將該1個以上第二圖像和對應第二圖像資訊候補集合的第一圖像相對應地積存於該第二圖像儲存部。 The image processing device according to claim 9, wherein the lookup table acquisition device further includes: a second image information candidate set storage unit that stores one corresponding to each of the first images or more a plurality of second image information candidate sets, wherein the second image information candidate set is a set of candidates of two or more second image information related to information of the second image; and the candidate output unit outputs the one or more a second image information candidate set; the instruction accepting unit that selects one of the candidates for the two or more second image information included in one or more second image information candidate sets output from the candidate output unit And an instruction of the candidate for the second image information; and the second image storage unit acquires one or more second candidates by using one or more second image information candidates corresponding to the instruction received by the instruction receiving unit The image is stored in the second image storage unit in association with the first image corresponding to the second image information candidate set. 一種圖像處理方法,係在儲存媒體中儲存有具備1個或2個以上對應資訊之查找表,該對應資訊為用以取得1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分與第二圖像之全部或一部分相對應的資訊,而該第二圖像係為與該第一 圖像相同對象之圖像,並得以藉由圖像受理部、映射部、及圖像輸出部實現之圖像處理方法,其特徵在於具備:圖像受理步驟,由該圖像受理部受理1個以上圖像;映射步驟,由該映射部使用該1個或2個以上對應資訊中之任一對應資訊,來取得與該圖像受理步驟所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應之1個以上第二圖像的全部或一部分;以及圖像輸出步驟,由該圖像輸出部將該映射步驟所取得之1個以上第二圖像的全部、或該映射步驟所取得之1個以上第二圖像之一部分之集合的1個以上輸出圖像予以輸出,其中,該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像具有以下關係:該第二圖像為與得到該第一圖像之環境不同的另一環境所得之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為局部插入有閃亮畫面之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為將該第一圖像變形後之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為對描寫該第一圖像的繪畫進行拍攝後所得之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為該第一圖像之CG圖像;該另一環境為照明或光源之光量比該環境多的環境,或者該另一環境為與該環境相比較該另一環境的光源位置能夠清楚表現出圖像上之物件影子的環境,或者該另一環境為與該環境相比較該另一環境的光源位置能夠清楚表現出圖像上之物件立體感的環境,或者該另一環境為與該環境相比較該另一環境的攝影機位置能夠清楚表現出圖像上之物件立體感的環境,或者該另一環境為照明顏色與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為天候與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為温度或者濕度與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為景深與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為快門速度與該環境不同的環境。 An image processing method is configured to store, in a storage medium, a lookup table having one or two or more corresponding information, wherein the corresponding information is used to obtain all or a part of the first image and the second image. All or part of the corresponding information, and the second image is the first An image processing method which is realized by an image receiving unit, a mapping unit, and an image output unit, and includes an image receiving step, and the image receiving unit accepts an image. More than one image; in the mapping step, the mapping unit acquires all or a part of one or more images accepted by the image receiving step by using any one of the one or more pieces of corresponding information Corresponding to all or part of the one or more second images; and the image output step, wherein the image output unit obtains all of the one or more second images obtained by the mapping step or the mapping step One or more output images of a set of one or more second images are output, wherein the second image has the following relationship with respect to the first image: the second image is obtained and the first image is obtained An image obtained by another environment having a different image environment; or the second image is an image partially inserted with a shiny image relative to the first image; or the second image The second image relative to the first image An image obtained by deforming the first image; or the second image is an image obtained by photographing a drawing depicting the first image with respect to the first image; Or the second image is a CG image of the first image relative to the first image; the other environment is an environment in which the amount of light of the illumination or the light source is greater than the environment, or the other An environment is an environment in which the position of the light source of the other environment can clearly represent the shadow of the object on the image compared to the environment, or the environment of the other environment can be clearly displayed compared to the environment. An environment in which the object is three-dimensionally on the image, or the other environment is an environment in which the camera position of the other environment is clearly compared with the environment, or the environment of the object on the image is clearly perceived, or the other environment is an illumination color. An environment different from the environment, or the other environment is an environment different from the environment, or the other environment is an environment in which the temperature or humidity is different from the environment, or the other environment is an environment in which the depth of field is different from the environment Or other environment for the shutter speed and the environment different. 一種儲存媒體,係儲存有具備1個或2個以上對應資訊之查找表,該對應資訊為取得1個以上第一圖像之全部或一部分與第二圖像之全部或一部分之對應的資訊,而該第二圖像係為與該第一圖像相同對象之圖像,藉以使電腦作為以下而發揮功能之程式: 圖像受理部,用以受理1個以上圖像;映射部,使用該1個或2個以上對應資訊中之任一對應資訊,取得與該圖像受理部所受理之1個以上圖像之全部或一部分相對應的1個以上第二圖像之全部或一部分;以及圖像輸出部,輸出1個以上輸出圖像,而該輸出圖像為該映射部所取得之1個以上第二圖像的全部、或該映射部所取得之1個以上第二圖像之一部分的集合,其中,該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像具有以下關係:該第二圖像為與得到該第一圖像之環境不同的另一環境所得之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為局部插入有閃亮畫面之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為將該第一圖像變形後之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為對描寫該第一圖像的繪畫進行拍攝後所得之圖像;或者該第二圖像相對於該第一圖像,該第二圖像為該第一圖像之CG圖像;該另一環境為照明或光源之光量比該環境多的環境,或者該另一環境為與該環境相比較該另一環境的光源位置能夠清楚表現出圖像上之物件影子的環境,或者該另一環境為與該環境相比較該另一環境的光源位置能夠清楚表現出圖像上之物件立體感的環境,或者該另一環境為與該環境相比較該另一環境的攝影機位置能夠清楚表現出圖像上之物件立體感的環境,或者該另一環境為照明顏色與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為天候與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為温度或者濕度與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為景深與該環境不同的環境,或者該另一環境為快門速度與該環境不同的環境。 A storage medium storing a lookup table having one or two or more corresponding information, wherein the corresponding information is information for obtaining all or a part of one or more first images corresponding to all or a part of the second image, And the second image is an image of the same object as the first image, so that the computer functions as the following program: The image receiving unit receives one or more images, and the mapping unit acquires one or more images accepted by the image receiving unit using any one of the one or two pieces of corresponding information. All or a part of all or a part of the corresponding one or more second images; and the image output unit outputs one or more output images, and the output image is one or more second images acquired by the mapping unit a set of one or more of the image, or a set of one or more second images obtained by the mapping unit, wherein the second image has a relationship with respect to the first image: the second image is obtained An image obtained by another environment having a different environment of the first image; or the image of the second image relative to the first image is an image partially inserted with a shiny image; or the second image The image is relative to the first image, the second image is an image obtained by deforming the first image; or the second image is a pair of images relative to the first image An image obtained by photographing the first image; or the second image is relative to a first image, the second image being a CG image of the first image; the other environment being an environment in which the amount of light of the illumination or light source is greater than the environment, or the other environment is compared to the environment The position of the light source of another environment can clearly show the environment of the object shadow on the image, or the other environment is an environment in which the position of the light source of the other environment can clearly express the stereoscopic effect of the object on the image compared with the environment. Or the other environment is an environment in which the camera position of the other environment can clearly express the stereoscopic effect of the object on the image compared to the environment, or the other environment is an environment in which the illumination color is different from the environment, or Another environment is an environment different from the environment, or the other environment is an environment in which the temperature or humidity is different from the environment, or the other environment is an environment in which the depth of field is different from the environment, or the other environment is a shutter speed A different environment than the environment.
TW105110393A 2012-08-17 2012-08-17 An image processing apparatus, an image processing method, and a storage medium for storing a program TWI586180B (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
TW105110393A TWI586180B (en) 2012-08-17 2012-08-17 An image processing apparatus, an image processing method, and a storage medium for storing a program

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
TW105110393A TWI586180B (en) 2012-08-17 2012-08-17 An image processing apparatus, an image processing method, and a storage medium for storing a program

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201628404A TW201628404A (en) 2016-08-01
TWI586180B true TWI586180B (en) 2017-06-01

Family

ID=57181924

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW105110393A TWI586180B (en) 2012-08-17 2012-08-17 An image processing apparatus, an image processing method, and a storage medium for storing a program

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI586180B (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050007159A1 (en) * 2002-02-21 2005-01-13 Tetsujiro Kondo Signal processor
TW201215105A (en) * 2010-06-28 2012-04-01 Intel Corp Single pipeline stereo image capture

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050007159A1 (en) * 2002-02-21 2005-01-13 Tetsujiro Kondo Signal processor
TW201215105A (en) * 2010-06-28 2012-04-01 Intel Corp Single pipeline stereo image capture

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201628404A (en) 2016-08-01

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR101961968B1 (en) Image processing device, image processing method, and recording medium that has recorded program
KR101961967B1 (en) Image processing device, image processing method, and recording medium that has recorded program
EP2309463A2 (en) Method of displaying a 3D video with insertion of a graphic item and terminal for implementing the method
KR101408719B1 (en) An apparatus for converting scales in three-dimensional images and the method thereof
JP6134414B2 (en) Image processing apparatus, image processing method, and program
JP6499612B2 (en) Image processing apparatus, image processing method, and program
EP2744209A1 (en) Content processing device, content processing method, and recording medium
TWI586180B (en) An image processing apparatus, an image processing method, and a storage medium for storing a program
JP5961389B2 (en) Image processing apparatus, image processing method, and program
TWI535297B (en) An image processing apparatus, an image processing method, and a storage medium for storing a program
TWI558219B (en) An image processing apparatus, an image processing method, and a storage medium for storing a program
JP6244397B2 (en) Look-up table acquisition device, look-up table production method, and program
TWI502960B (en) Device and method for 2d to 3d conversion
Vázquez et al. A non-conventional approach to the conversion of 2D video and film content to stereoscopic 3D
WO2019039296A1 (en) Video processing device, video processing method, program, and remote communication system
JP2001331246A (en) Picture associated data display device